2022 GRAND CHEROKEE/GRAND CHEROKEE L
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
22_WL_OM_EN_USC
2022 GRAND CHEROKEE
GRAND CHEROKEE L
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................ 10
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 95
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 122
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................203
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................249
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................309
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................334
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 400
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .................................................................................................... 407
11 INDEX ...............................................................................................................................................411
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 11
ROLLOVER WARNING .......................................... 11
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 12
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ........................................................................ 17
Key Fob .............................................................17
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 21
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................22
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 23
How To Use Remote Start................................23
To Exit Remote Start Mode .............................24
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................25
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................25
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................25
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................25
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................26
To Arm The System ..........................................26
To Disarm The System.....................................26
Rearming Of The System .................................27
Security System Manual Override...................27
Tamper Alert .....................................................27
DOORS.....................................................................27
Manual Door Locks ..........................................27
Power Door Locks ...........................................28
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...........28
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit......................31
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped........................................................31
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .......................................................31
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................32
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped......................................32
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped........................................................32
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped............33
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS — IF EQUIPPED ..................................33
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................33
Basic Voice Commands ...................................33
Get Started .......................................................34
Additional Information .....................................34
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .................................... 34
Programming The Memory Feature................35
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob
To Memory........................................................35
Memory Position Recall ...................................36
SEATS .................................................................. 36
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................36
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................37
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped ......................................................42
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................44
Power Seatback Massage — If Equipped .......45
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........................46
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................46
Head Restraints .............................................47
MIRRORS ............................................................... 50
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................50
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............................51
Outside Mirrors ................................................52
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped .......................................................52
Power Mirrors ...................................................52
Automatic Power Folding
Mirrors — If Equipped.......................................53
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................53
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....53
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED............................. 54
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.......................................................54
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............54
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................54
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener .....................................................55
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ......................................56
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................56
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........56
Security .............................................................57
Troubleshooting Tips........................................57
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 58
Headlight Switch ..............................................58
Multifunction Lever ..........................................59
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .......................................................59
High/Low Beam Switch....................................59
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped.............59
Flash-To-Pass....................................................60
Automatic Headlights ......................................60
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................60
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers ......60
Headlight Illumination On Approach...............61
Headlight Delay ................................................61
Lights-On Reminder .........................................61
Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................62
Turn Signals......................................................62
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................62
Automatic Headlight Leveling —
If Equipped........................................................62
Battery Saver....................................................62
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................63
Courtesy Lights.................................................63
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ..............64
Windshield Wiper Operation............................65
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............66
Rear Wiper And Washer ..................................66
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ........67
CLIMATE CONTROLS..............................................67
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions...................................................67
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............73
Climate Voice Recognition...............................74
Operating Tips .................................................74
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 75
Storage .............................................................75
Sun Screens — If Equipped .............................77
USB/AUX Control..............................................77
Electrical Power Outlets...................................79
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................81
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ............81
WINDOWS ............................................................. 82
Power Window Controls...................................82
Wind Buffeting .................................................83
POWER SUNROOF ................................................ 84
Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped ....84
Dual Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped .......85
HOOD....................................................................... 87
Opening The Hood ...........................................87
Closing The Hood .............................................87
LIFTGATE................................................................. 88
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..........................88
To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................88
Adjustable Power Liftgate Height....................89
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .................90
Cargo Area Features ........................................91
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............. 94
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 95
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................96
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 97
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................98
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 99
Location And Controls......................................99
Engine Oil Life Reset .................................... 101
Display And Messages .................................. 103
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..... 104
Head Up Display (HUD) —
If Equipped ................................................... 107
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................. 108
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................110
Red Warning Lights ....................................... 110
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 113
Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 117
Green Indicator Lights................................... 118
White Indicator Lights ................................... 119
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 120
Gray Indicator Lights ..................................... 120
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...... 120
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 120
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.......................................................... 121
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ...................................... 122
Automatic Transmission ............................... 122
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition................... 122
Normal Starting ............................................. 122
AutoPark ........................................................ 123
If Engine Fails To Start.................................. 124
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 125
After Starting ................................................. 125
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ......... 125
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ........ 125
PARKING BRAKE................................................. 126
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................. 126
Auto Park Brake ............................................ 127
SafeHold ........................................................ 128
Hold ‘N Go — If Equipped ............................. 128
Brake Maintenance Mode............................ 128
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............................129
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 130
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System ............................................... 130
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ............... 130
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED............................134
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION......................134
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped............................ 134
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped............................ 134
Shift Positions ............................................... 135
Shifting Procedures....................................... 135
Quadra-Trac II System — If Equipped........... 136
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
If Equipped ................................................... 136
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED........................137
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection ...................... 137
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 138
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED ............................138
Description .................................................... 138
Air Suspension Modes.................................. 140
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 141
Operation....................................................... 141
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................142
POWER STEERING...............................................142
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............143
Autostop Mode .............................................. 143
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 143
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode .............................................................. 144
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 144
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 144
System Malfunction ...................................... 144
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................144
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................... 145
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................153
Activation/Deactivation ................................ 154
Traffic Sign Assist Modes.............................. 154
Indications On The Display ........................... 154
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 155
Operation ....................................................... 155
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off........ 157
Indications On The Display ........................... 159
System Status ............................................... 160
System Operation/Limitations ..................... 160
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 161
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 162
ParkSense Display ........................................ 162
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 165
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 165
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System ........................................................... 165
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 166
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 166
Side Distance Warning System .................... 167
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................................... 169
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System............................. 169
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation.................................... 170
Exiting The Parking Space ............................ 172
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................173
Active Lane Management Operation ........... 173
Turning Active Lane Management On
Or Off.............................................................. 174
Active Lane Management Warning
Message ........................................................ 174
Changing Active Lane Management
Status............................................................. 176
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............176
Zoom View ..................................................... 177
Viewing At Speed........................................... 178
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................178
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...................179
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................180
Detection Range ........................................... 181
Service The Night Vision System.................. 182
Night Vision System Limitations................... 182
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................183
Zoom View ..................................................... 185
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................185
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................186
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 186
Payload .......................................................... 186
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 186
Tire Size.......................................................... 187
Rim Size ......................................................... 187
Inflation Pressure .......................................... 187
Curb Weight ................................................... 187
Loading .......................................................... 187
TRAILER TOWING ..............................................187
Common Towing Definitions......................... 187
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 190
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .............. 190
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped..................................................... 192
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 192
Towing Requirements .................................. 193
Towing Tips ................................................... 195
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................196
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle............................................................ 196
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 197
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case without
4WD LOW Range) Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 197
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II
with 4WD LOW Range................................... 197
DRIVING TIPS ...................................................... 200
On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 200
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 200
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................... 203
CYBERSECURITY ................................................. 203
UCONNECT SETTINGS......................................... 204
Customer Programmable Features ............. 204
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ............. 229
Radio Operation ............................................ 229
Media Mode................................................... 229
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED.............. 229
Passenger Screen Permissions.................... 229
Home Screen................................................. 230
Audio And Video ............................................ 231
Rear Seat Entertainment
With Amazon FireTV Built-In —
If Equipped..................................................... 233
HDMI Projecting ............................................ 233
Device Manager ............................................ 233
Navigation...................................................... 234
Camera .......................................................... 234
3RD PARTY APPS................................................234
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON
FIRETV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED ......................235
Overview ........................................................ 235
Getting Started.............................................. 236
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with
Amazon FireTV Built-in from the Radio........ 236
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with
Amazon FireTV Built-in from the Rear
Screens.......................................................... 236
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with
Amazon FireTV Built-in from the Passenger
Screen — If Equipped.................................... 236
First Time Starting Up
(Using the Rear Screens).............................. 237
Rear Screen Fly-out Menu............................ 237
Parental Controls
(Using the Rear Screens).............................. 238
Pairing The Remote
(Using the Rear Screens).............................. 238
Media Sources Input (Using the Radio
and Rear Screens) ........................................ 238
Rear Seat Entertainment Remote Control .. 239
Rear Seat Entertainment with Amazon
FireTV Built-in Streaming (Using the
Radio and Rear Screens).............................. 240
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
Rear Screen Entertainment with
Amazon FireTV Built-in Apps/Games
(Using the Rear Screens).............................. 241
Are We There Yet?......................................... 241
Rear Seat Entertainment with Amazon
FireTV Built-in 3rd Party Apps —
If Equipped..................................................... 241
Using The Video USB Port............................. 242
Play Video Games.......................................... 242
Headphones Operation................................. 242
Rear Climate Controls................................... 243
Legal Notice................................................... 245
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ...................245
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 245
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................... 246
Accessory Gauges ........................................ 246
Pitch & Roll ................................................... 246
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ......................... 247
Suspension — If Equipped ............................ 247
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES ................................................................248
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 248
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 249
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 249
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) —
If Equipped..................................................... 250
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ................ 251
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 251
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 257
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)........................ 257
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation....................................................... 261
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)............................................................ 264
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................... 269
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 269
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 269
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 270
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 277
Child Restraints ............................................ 290
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................ 305
Transporting Passengers.............................. 305
Transporting Pets ....................................... 306
Connected Vehicles ...................................... 306
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 306
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 307
Exhaust Gas................................................... 308
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 308
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS.........................309
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED .......309
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .........................313
Preparations For Jacking.............................. 313
Jack Location................................................. 314
Spare Tire Stowage....................................... 315
Spare Tire Removal....................................... 316
Jacking Instructions ..................................... 318
JUMP STARTING ..................................................322
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 322
Jump Starting Procedure.............................. 323
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ..............................325
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................326
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ..................................326
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................328
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................329
Rear Wheel Drive Models............................. 330
All Wheel Drive Models................................. 330
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.......... 331
Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped ...................... 331
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...................................................................333
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................333
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................334
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 335
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................339
2.0L Engine ................................................... 339
3.6L Engine.................................................... 340
5.7L Engine.................................................... 341
Checking Oil Level .................................... 342
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 342
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 343
Pressure Washing ......................................... 343
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................343
Engine Oil....................................................... 344
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 344
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 345
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 345
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 348
Body Lubrication............................................ 348
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 349
Exhaust System ............................................ 351
Cooling System.............................................. 353
Brake System ............................................... 356
Automatic Transmission ............................... 357
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................... 358
Transfer Case ............................................... 358
Fuses.............................................................. 359
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 378
TIRES..................................................................... 378
Tire Safety Information ................................. 378
Tires — General Information......................... 385
Tire Types....................................................... 389
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 390
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 391
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 393
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 395
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................... 395
Treadwear...................................................... 395
Traction Grades............................................. 396
Temperature Grades..................................... 396
STORING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 396
BODYWORK ......................................................... 396
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......... 396
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 397
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 397
INTERIORS .......................................................... 398
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 398
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 398
Leather Surfaces........................................... 399
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 399
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........400
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................400
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................400
Torque Specifications ................................... 400
FUEL REQUIREMENTS.........................................401
2.0L Engine ................................................... 401
3.6L Engine .................................................. 401
5.7L Engine ................................................... 401
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 402
Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 402
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 402
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................... 402
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...... 403
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................... 403
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 403
FLUID CAPACITIES ..............................................404
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................405
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................406
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ............................................407
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 407
Prepare A List ................................................ 407
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 407
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 407
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 407
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 407
Mexico............................................................ 408
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 408
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).................... 408
Service Contract ........................................... 408
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................409
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................409
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................409
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 409
In Canada ...................................................... 409
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................410
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................410
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. The all-new
Jeep® Grand Cherokee/Grand Cherokee L continues to build on its proud legacy as the most celebrated SUV ever, while raising the bar in luxury and
performance. With legendary 4x4 capability, this vehicle breaks new ground in exceptional performance, comfort, and functionality. We have improved on-road
refinement and premium styling and craftsmanship inside and out. With an unsurpassed blend of refined sophistication, dynamic performance, cutting edge
technologies, and levels of elegance, the new Jeep® Grand Cherokee/Grand Cherokee L carries an attractive presence and capability that is uncommon in its
class, unquestionably Jeep® brand, and unmistakably world class.
The all-new Jeep® Grand Cherokee/Grand Cherokee L is a specialized utility vehicle and can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional
passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your
vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe
conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 200.
Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips,
and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
1
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 110.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 110
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 110
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 111
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 111
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 111
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 111
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 112
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 112
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 112
Night Vision Animal Warning Light
Ú page 112
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
Ú page 112
Red Warning Lights
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 112
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 112
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 113
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 113
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 113
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 113
Active Driving Assist - Driver Inattentiveness Warning Light
Ú page 110
Red Warning Lights
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 114
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 114
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 114
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 114
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
Ú page 114
Active Lane Management Warning Light
Ú page 114
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 114
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 115
1
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Night Vision Animal Warning Light
Ú page 112
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
Ú page 112
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 115
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 115
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
Ú page 115
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 116
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 116
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 116
Yellow Warning Lights
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 117
Active Driving Assist - Driver Inattentiveness Warning Light
Ú page 113
Active Driving Assist Fault Warning Light
Ú page 113
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
Ú page 117
Yellow Indicator Lights
Sway Bar Indicator Light
Ú page 117
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Yellow Warning Lights
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
Maximum Payload Exceeded Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 117
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Yellow Indicator Lights
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
Ú page 118
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Auto HOLD Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Night Vision Active Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 118
1
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 119
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 119
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 119
Active Driving Assist - Driver Attentive Indicator Light
Ú page 118
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 119
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 119
Green Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 119
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light
Ú page 119
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
Ú page 119
Active Driving Assist On Indicator Light
Ú page 119
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 120
Gray Indicator Lights
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light
Ú page 120
White Indicator Lights
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote
Start (if equipped), and remote power liftgate
(if equipped) operation. The key fob allows you to
lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, as well as
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the key
fob will operate at distances up to 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
Ú page 81.
With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob
1 — LED Indicator
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Power Liftgate
6 — Panic
7 — Emergency Key
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In case the ignition switch does not change
positions with the push of a button, the key fob
may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key
fob battery can be verified by referring to the
instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
For more information on ignition positions, see
Ú page 22.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by
a message in the instrument cluster display, or by
the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light
no longer illuminates after a key fob button is
pushed, then the key fob battery requires
replacement Ú page 410.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock
button once.
If enabled within the Uconnect system, the turn
signals will flash and the illuminated entry system
will be activated when the doors are unlocked.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will
flash and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and the Vehicle Security
system will arm (if equipped).
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through Uconnect
Settings Ú page 204.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Left
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster
display along with an interior chime. An exterior
audible and visual alert will also be activated to
warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are all closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Using The Key Fob To Open Vehicle
Windows — If Equipped
From outside of the vehicle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob, and within five
seconds push and hold the unlock button for up to
seven seconds. All vehicle door windows will open.
NOTE:
This feature is enabled through Uconnect
Settings Ú page 204.
Vehicle must be equipped with front and rear
auto up/down windows.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery specifications may not meet the original
OEM coin battery specifications.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the
key fob above the top row buttons blinks when
a button is pressed. The coin battery should last
a minimum of three years with normal vehicle
usage.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by pushing
the emergency key release button (1) on the
side of the key fob, and pulling the emergency
key out with the other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
Emergency Key Removed
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
down, and locate the small rectangular gap on
the left side between the housing and the back
cover of the key fob. Use a small flat-bladed
tool to pry apart the two halves of the key fob.
Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
Pry Apart Key Fob Halves
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key
fob, which is positioned farther to the edge
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back toward
the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
You can also insert a screwdriver or similar
tool into the battery removal pocket to pry the
battery out.
Battery Removal Pocket
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to
push down and slide the battery under the
small lip on the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top
edge of the back cover with the top of the fob,
and press the edges into the interlocking
hinges until all edges snap together with no
large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks
into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 410.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF,
ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start
(when foot is on the brake pedal)
NOTE:
If the ignition position does not change with a
push of the ignition button, and the instrument
cluster displays a message such as “Key Fob
Not Detected”, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side
opposite of the emergency key) against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Replacement of the key fob battery is
recommended.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device, or in the cupholders near aluminum
cans; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
For more information on the engine starting
procedure, see Ú page 122.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position (engine not running),
a chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
chime, the message “Ignition ON” will display in
the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range Ú page 410.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing
the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always place the
ignition in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the Remote Start button on the key fob is
pushed too rapidly during activation, the vehicle
may not start.
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10
seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
Headlight animation (if equipped) will occur
when Remote Start is activated, if “Headlight
Illumination On Approach” is enabled within
Uconnect Settings.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security Light is flashing
Ignition in OFF position
PANIC button is not pushed
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle
Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will
resume the previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu
screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 204. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when Remote Start is
activated, if programmed in the comfort menu
screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
The climate controls will automatically adjust to
the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position where the climate controls will
resume their previous settings.
For more information on ATC and climate control
settings, see Ú page 67.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control setting will
change, and exit automatic operation, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in
Remote Start mode.
This includes the OFF button on the climate
controls, which will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue Ú page 204.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches
for door locks and liftgate release handle are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
Make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 28.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
Vehicle Security Light (located in the lower right
portion of the instrument cluster display) will begin
to flash every two seconds until it is disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock button
on the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security
Light will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once
the door is closed, then slow down to every two
seconds.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 28.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the
door key cylinder when the alarm is armed will
sound the alarm when the door is opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power liftgate is opened using the lift-
gate button on the key fob. If someone enters
the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door from the inside, the alarm will sound.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock
the liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is
disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will
remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock
on first press within Uconnect Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the emergency lock lever
Ú page 27.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security
system in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three times
when you disarm the Vehicle Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The front doors can be manually unlocked with a
single pull of the inside door handle. The driver’s
door can also be manually unlocked by inserting
the emergency key into the lock cylinder on the
outside door handle.
NOTE:
When using the emergency key to unlock the
outside door handle, make sure the handle of the
emergency key is pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle. This will ensure the handle can be pulled
all the way out while the key is in the lock cylinder.
The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a
double pull of the inside door handle.
Each door can be manually locked by inserting the
emergency key into the emergency lock lever and
sliding the lever upward. The emergency lock lever
is located on the door latch face of each door.
Emergency Lock Lever (Driver’s Door Shown)
NOTE:
The emergency lock lever is only accessible
when the door is open.
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock buttons are located on each
front door panel. Push the lock button to lock all
doors and liftgate, or the unlock button to unlock
all doors and liftgate.
When the doors are locked, an indicator light in the
lock button will illuminate.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are detected inside the vehicle when the door
lock button on the front door panel is used to lock
the door, then the door is closed. The horn will also
chirp to alert the driver. This will occur for two
attempts. On the third attempt, the doors will lock
even if the key is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may
not unlock automatically.
If the door lock button is pushed while the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position and the driver's door is
open, the doors will not lock.
Rear Passenger Power Door Locks
Power door lock buttons are located on each rear
door trim panel. Push the lock button to lock all
doors and liftgate, and the unlock button to unlock
all doors and liftgate.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
If equipped, the rear doors will also have Passive
Entry capabilities.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob's wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry handle
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
parking lights, door handle pocket lights [if
equipped]) for whichever time duration is set
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock and lock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
The doors may lock and unlock when water is
sprayed on the Passive Entry door handles, if
the key fob is located outside of the vehicle
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
Passive Entry lock initiates one horn chirp and
one flash of turn signal lights. These settings
can be programmed on/off within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 204.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and will rearm the Vehicle
Security system (if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the front passenger door handle (or a
rear handle when equipped with four-door Passive
Entry) will unlock all doors and the liftgate
automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
(or a rear door when equipped with four-door
Passive Entry) door handle is grabbed regard-
less of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm
or armed status and the liftgate transitions from
opened to closed.
When the liftgate transitions from open to
closed and Remote Start is active.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the emer-
gency lock lever.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry
door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle,
touch the lock icon on the door handle to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Touch The Door Handle Lock Icon To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when touching the
lock icon. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After touching the door handle lock icon, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors using any Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release button. With a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release button
for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power
Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and lift
for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Electronic Liftgate Handle
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock
button located on the outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate Ú page 410.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following sequence
of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 204.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per
written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the
system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if
the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is
impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
telescoping steering column lever is located below
the multifunction lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering
column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your key fob or the memory
switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the
tilt/telescopic steering column to saved positions
Ú page 34.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the radio
screen, and within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 25.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or say the vehicle’s Wake
Up word, “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Jeep®”. The
factory default Wake Up word is set to “Hey
Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed through the
Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system. You can also use
the system’s “Wake Up” word to activate voice
recognition. The “Wake Up” word can be set
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button or say the “Wake Up” word,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
You can also interrupt the help message or
system prompts by speaking. This feature is
called “barge-in” and can be set through the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 410.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver, and if equipped, also
the front passenger to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position
settings for the following features:
Driver’s Side
Seat position
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Me-
dia, Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone
Call, And Send Or Receive A Text
1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation:
Push The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming
Phone Call
2 — Push To Access Tile Mode On The Instrument
Cluster
3 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call
Currently In Progress
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Passenger’s Side (If Equipped)
Seat Position
The memory settings switches are located on the
front door panels, next to the door handle, and
consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Setting Buttons
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either driver’s side memory
position 1 or 2.
Front passenger memory settings cannot be
linked to a key fob.
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power
tilt/telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of
the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument
cluster display will indicate which memory
position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be below 5 mph
(8 km/h) to recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of
two saved driver’s side memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired driver’s side memory profile,
1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
(1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s
side memory settings by pushing the set (S) button,
and within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
Memory Recall is available when not in PARK, if the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
To recall a memory settings profile using the
memory switches, push memory button (1) or
(2) on the memory switch.
To recall the driver’s side memory settings using
the key fob, push the unlock button on the key
fob linked to memory position 1 or 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches.
When a recall is canceled, the seat and power tilt/
telescopic steering column (if equipped) will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
(FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The passenger seat can be
adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar
located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
floor.
Adjustment Bar
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
WARNING!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion and move the seat forward
or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal position, lean forward and lift the lever. To
ensure the seatback is latched, use body pressure
to lean forward and rearward.
Recline Lever
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Vehicles equipped with third row seating may have
a second row bench seat, or second row captain’s
chairs. Vehicles equipped with only second row
seating, will have a second row bench seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are
left folded for an extended period of time. This is
normal and by simply unfolding the seats to the
open position, over time the seat cushion will
return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT FORWARD/REAR-
WARD ADJUSTMENT — IF EQUIPPED
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of
the seat near the floor and release it when the seat
is at the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT RECLINE ADJUST-
MENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position and
release the lever.
To return the seatback to its normal position, lean
forward and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback
is latched, use body pressure to lean forward and
rearward.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
SECOND ROW BENCH FOLD FLAT SEAT
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo
space and still maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position.
Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat
to fold down easily.
To lower the seatback, pull upward on the recline
lever located on the outboard side of the seat, and
let the seatback fold forward automatically.
Second Row Bench Seat Folded Flat
To raise the seatback, fold the seatback up into its
original position and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT EASY ACCESS FOR
THIRD ROW — IF EQUIPPED
If the vehicle is equipped with third row seating, the
second row seats can tip forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the
outboard side of the seatback, then tip and slide
the entire seat forward.
Easy Entry Lever Location
Access To Third Row Seats
To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold the
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
rearward until the track locks.
Second Row Captain’s Chairs —
If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with third row seating may be
equipped with second row captain’s chairs.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FORWARD/
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of
the seat near the floor and release it when the seat
is at the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS RECLINE
ADJUSTMENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal position, lean forward and lift the lever. To
ensure the seatback is latched, use body pressure
to lean forward and rearward.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD FLAT
SEATS
The second row seatbacks can be folded flat to
carry cargo.
Pull upward on the recline lever located on the
outboard side of each second row seat, and guide
the seatback down into the folded position.
Second Row Captain’s Chairs Folded Flat
To Raise The Rear Seats
Fold the seatbacks upward to their original
position, and lock them into place.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIR EASY ACCESS
FOR THIRD ROW
The second row seats can tip forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the
outboard side of the seatback, then tip and slide
the entire seat forward.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Easy Entry Lever Location
Access To Third Row Seats
To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold the
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
rearward until the track locks.
Manual Folding Third Row — If Equipped
Both third row seats can be folded forward to
increase the cargo area. To lower either seat, pull
on the release handle located on the back of the
seat and lower the seat using the pull strap located
next to the release handle.
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright
position or folded flat when folding the third row
seats.
Release Handles
Third Row Folded
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using
the strap located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with 12-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the
seat. There are three switches that control the
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in
two directions. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has
been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
1 — Cushion Extender Switch
2 — Seat Switch
3 — Seatback And Bolster Adjustment Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Seatback Bolster Adjustment
The front driver and passenger seatback bolsters
can be extended outward, or retracted inward by
pushing the bolster adjustment button located in
the center of the seatback switch.
Push the top of the button to extend the bolsters,
or push the bottom of the button to retract the
bolsters.
Seatback Bolster Adjustment Button
Cushion Extender
The cushion can be extended forward a few inches
(centimeters) to increase thigh support. Push the
cushion extender switch forward or rearward to
extend or retract the cushion. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (6 cm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(6.8 cm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when you
place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of
an inch (2.3 cm) forward of the rear stop. At this
position, there is no benefit to the driver by
moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
setting profile Ú page 34.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
within the Uconnect system Ú page 204.
1 — Extend Seatback Bolsters
2 — Retract Seatback Bolsters
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Rear Seat Power Folding Seatbacks —
If Equipped
If the vehicle is equipped with third row seating, the
second and third rows may be equipped with
power folding seatbacks.
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in
the right rear trim panel inside the cargo area, as
part of a switch bank.
NOTE:
The third row seat belts may interfere with the
power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt
webbing behind the stow clip before stowing or
opening the seat. When the seat is in the desired
position, remove the webbing from the stow clip so
that it is ready for use. Never leave the seat belt in
the stow clip when it is used to restrain an
occupant.
NOTE:
The head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move
when the vehicle is in PARK, and a rear door or the
liftgate is open.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding
positions for the second and third row seats. The
second row seats can be folded using these
switches, while the third row can be folded or
unfolded.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be
positioned properly on the occupant and they
could be more seriously injured in an accident
as a result.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
1 — Second Row Left Side Fold
2 — Second Row Right Side Fold
3 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
4 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
There are also power folding switches for the third
row seats located on the C-pillar (just behind the
rear doors on the trim panels).
C-Pillar Power Folding Switches (Left Side Shown)
POWER SEATBACK MASSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbacks may
be equipped with power massage.
The massage feature can be turned on/off through
the massage button located on the door panel
near the handle, or through the Comfort screen on
the radio.
Door Panel Massage Button
Once activated by either method, the massage
controls screen will display on the radio screen,
and “Massage Type” and “Intensity Level” can be
selected for the activated seat.
There are four intensity levels and five massage
types that can be selected.
Intensity Levels:
High
Med
Low
Off
Massage Types:
Waterfall
Lower Back
Extend
Low Extend
Rock Climb
The selected settings will save in the system’s
memory when turned off, and will resume the next
time the system is turned on.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the power seat-
back massage to operate.
The massage feature will turn off after
20 minutes of use. However, if the massage
type or intensity level is changed, the timer then
resets.
1 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
2 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons
are located on the center stack below the
radio screen or within the Uconnect
system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen and the
controls screen.
Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI
setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a second time to
turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn
the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 25.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may
be equipped with heated seats. There
are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center
console.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat
settings. Indicator lights in each switch illuminate
indicating the level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI
setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a second time to
turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn
the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment
and move air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the occupant cooler in higher
ambient temperatures.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Front Ventilated Seats
The ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the
radio screen or within the Uconnect
system. The fans operate at three
speeds, HI, MED and LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose
HI.
Press the ventilated seat switch a second time
to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to
turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 25.
Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may
be equipped with ventilated seats. The
rear ventilated seat control switches are
located on the rear of the center console
and allow the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The fans operate at three speeds:
HI, MED, and LO. Push the ventilated seat switches
to toggle through the speeds, or to turn the feature
off.
There are two ventilated seat switches
Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose
HI.
Press the ventilated seat switch a second time
to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to
turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver
and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of
the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle
as desired and release. To adjust the head
restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and release.
The head restraint will return to the rear most
position.
Upright Position
Forward Adjustment
Head Restraints — Second Row Captain’s
Chairs (If Equipped)
If the second row is equipped with captain’s chairs,
the head restraints are not adjustable or
removable. They automatically fold forward when
the seatback is folded, and do not return to their
normal position when the seatback is raised. After
returning the seatback to its upright position after
a folding operation, raise the head restraint until it
locks in place.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
(If Equipped)
If the second row is equipped with a bench seat,
the head restraints on the outboard seats are not
adjustable or removable. They automatically fold
forward when the seatback is folded, and do not
return to their normal position when the seatback
is raised. After returning the seatback to its upright
position after a folding operation, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place.
The center head restraint has one adjustment
position, and can be adjusted up or down when the
seat is occupied. Pull up on the head restraint to
raise it. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint until it locks into place.
NOTE:
The center head restraint is not removable.
Center Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering, see
Ú page 269.
Third Row Head Restraints — If Equipped
The third row head restraints are not adjustable or
removable, but can be folded for improved visibility
when the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no
occupants in the seats.
Press the “Headrest Fold” button within
the Controls menu of the Uconnect
system to power fold the third row head
restraints.
The head restraints will also automatically fold
when the seatbacks are folded forward using the
release handles on the backs of the seats from the
cargo area.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (small control forward toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s view.
You can turn the feature on or off through the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road
behind while driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
Rearview Mirror mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
rearward toward the driver.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the menu button next to the on/off control/
toggle to access the following mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during nighttime driving in low light applications
due to low ambient light levels. In the event that
it provides the user with less than expected
vision, the mirror can be reverted to a normal
reflective electrochromatic mirror by pushing
the control/toggle forward in the vehicle and
putting the mirror into Automatic Dimming
Mirror mode.
When the rear window washer is activated by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
forward, the rear backup and digital rearview
mirror (if equipped) cameras are also washed.
For more information, see Ú page 66.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn
on automatically.
Lift Cover On Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror.
The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the
mirror you want to adjust (L) or (R). Then push the
switch in the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power Mirror Switch
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob
to the neutral position to prevent accidental
movements.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Neutral Position
2 — Left Mirror
3 — Control Switch
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Power Folding
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding
Mirror function, rotate the control switch to the
power folding position. Rotating the control to the
left, right, or neutral position will return the mirrors
to the driving position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again
during door mirror folding (from closed to open
position and vice versa), the movement direction is
reversed.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power
folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
them by turning the switch (this may require
multiple switch activations to synchronize the
driver and passenger mirror). This resets them to
their normal position.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the
Driver Memory Settings (if equipped) Ú page 34.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 204, the exterior mirrors will automatically
fold when the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position, and after the doors are locked and
closed.
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following
situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position:
Pushing the lock button on the door panel
before the door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock
button again.
Opening the door, then pushing the lock button
on the door panel, followed by closing the door.
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then
push the lock button on the key fob.
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then
touch the lock icon on the Passive Entry door
handle.
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically,
they will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the
power folding mirror switch on the driver’s door
panel, they will not automatically unfold.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 67.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. Outside mirrors will move slightly downward
from the present position when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will then
return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored
memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button Ú page 410.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it
is recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying
to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, proceed
as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener” in this section for the procedure on
how to program HomeLink® to a miscellaneous
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
non-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, proceed as follows. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not be
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out
in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people or pets are in the path of the door or
gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Make
sure while programming HomeLink® with the
engine on that your vehicle is outside of your
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until
HomeLink® has successfully accepted the
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.
The headlight switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener without these
safety features.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking lights and
instrument panel lights position to the AUTO
position for automatic headlights. Rotate to the
second detent to turn on headlights, parking lights,
and instrument panel lights operation.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter
and less susceptible to stone breakage than
glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as
glass and therefore different lens cleaning
procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ON/RUN
position, or the parking brake is engaged. The low
beams must be used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon-
nect system Ú page 204.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering
wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the
high beams off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of a
digital camera mounted on the inside rearview
mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials
to clean the lenses.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system can
be turned on or off by selecting or deselecting
“Auto High Beam” within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 204.
The headlight switch must also be turned to the
AUTO position after Automatic High Beams is
enabled within Uconnect Settings for the
feature to activate.
Automatic High Beams will only activate when
the vehicle speed is above 22 mph (35 km/h).
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlight Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance.
See a local authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for
up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into
the OFF position. The headlight time delay can be
programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds within the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
HEADLIGHTS ON AUTOMATICALLY WITH
W
IPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on
when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime,
the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and
decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed
or not Ú page 63.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON
A
PPROACH
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door
handle pocket lights (if equipped), and interior
lights will illuminate when the unlock button on the
key fob is pushed as the operator is approaching
the vehicle. This feature can be turned on/off, and
the length of time the headlights stay on can be
programmed for up to 90 seconds within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 204.
Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped
This feature is enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system, and is activated when the
operator approaches the driver’s door,
passenger’s door, or liftgate with a valid key fob on
their person. Some exterior and interior lights will
illuminate in order to provide an increased sense
of welcome and security as the operator
approaches the vehicle in the dark. “Headlight
Illumination On Approach” must be selected and
set to a time value other than zero within Uconnect
Settings for Proximity Wake-Up to activate.
The doors may be locked or unlocked for this
feature to activate, as long as the ignition is in the
OFF position, or during a Remote Start event. It will
not activate if the doors are locked and the ignition
was placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the
following conditions:
After numerous consecutive activations, in
order to conserve the vehicle’s battery
After the vehicle’s engine has been off for
several days
Headlight Animation — If Equipped
When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is
turned on, and set to a time value above zero, the
exterior lights illuminate in a theatrical manner
during approach to the vehicle. This feature is
activated in the following situations:
Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated
Remote Start is activated
The unlock button on the key fob is pushed
NOTE:
For Headlight Animation to activate with Remote
Start or with the push of the unlock button,
“Greeting Lights” must also be selected within the
Uconnect system.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can
be canceled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON/
RUN position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay time is programmable through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights, and push the fog
light button on the headlight switch.
Fog Light Button
Fog Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on, or when the vehicle headlights are on
low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate when the
fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when
the button is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve
visibility at night while turning the vehicle. When
activated, a light incorporated in the front fog light
will illuminate on the side of the vehicle the
steering wheel is rotated or the turn signal
indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will
flash to show proper operation of the front and rear
turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast cluster turn indicator flash rate,
check for a defective outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature prevents the headlights from
interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers.
Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height
of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in
vehicle pitch.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
shedding is provided for both the interior and
exterior lights.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position and any
door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the overhead
console Dome On switch is left on for 10 minutes,
the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is in the OFF position,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
front doors are opened or the Dome ON button is
pushed on the overhead console. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the
unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door
is open and the interior lights are on, pressing the
Dome Defeat button on the overhead console will
cause all of the interior lights to turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console lights can also be operated
individually as reading lights by pushing the
corresponding buttons.
Courtesy Lights
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
Located above the rear passenger seating in both
second and third rows, along the trim, are
courtesy/reading lights. The courtesy lights turn on
when a door or the liftgate is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob
is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights.
Push the reading light button to turn these lights
on while inside the vehicle. Push the reading light
button a second time to turn each light off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to
the headlight switch located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument cluster lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
interior light levels of the ambient lighting on the
instrument panel and doors. Certain ambient lights
may be color customizable Ú page 64.
Dimmer Controls
1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Ambient Light
4 — Dome ON Button
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Multicolor ambient lighting for first and second
rows, and overhead white ambient lighting in
the second and third row (if equipped) seating
areas, may not be equipped in the vehicle.
The dimming of lighting linked to the headlight
status (i.e. radio screen brightness) is program-
mable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
Multicolor Ambient Lighting — If Equipped
The color of certain ambient lighting inside of the
vehicle can be selected within the Apps menu on
the radio screen, or within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 204. Brightness is adjusted using the
ambient light dimmer control on the headlight
switch.
Five colors can be selected for the following two
zones inside of the vehicle:
Zone 1:
Instrument panel decorative ambient lights
Door panel decorative ambient lights
Zone 2:
Front seat footwell areas below the instru-
ment panel
Lighting below the second row seats
Map pocket lighting on all four door panels
These areas can be set to different colors, or if the
SYNC button is selected within the settings menu,
all colored lights will be set to the same color
automatically.
NOTE:
All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle will
remain white, and the ambient light dimmer
control switch will adjust all ambient lighting at the
same time.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever.
Multifunction Lever
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end
of the lever upward, to the first detent past the
intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation. To turn the
windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the
lever all the way down to OFF.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate
the switch at the end of the wiper lever to the first
detent position, and then turn the switch at the end
of the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are four delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one
cycle every second to a maximum of approximately
36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward
you and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled
while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
will operate several cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
If the front window washer feature is activated,
all of the front cameras (if equipped) on the
vehicle will be washed as well.
Due to washer pump packaging, the front
camera washers will run out of fluid before the
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light is activated.
When the front camera washers stop func-
tioning, add fluid to the washer fluid reservoir to
resume function.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 349.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot
return to the “park” position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper lever to one
of the four detent positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position
1 is the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity
position 4 is the most sensitive.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the low, high, or OFF posi-
tion. Only in one of the intermittent positions.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off through the Uconnect system Ú page 204.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features
for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Sensing feature will not operate when the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON/RUN position, when
the vehicle is stationary and the outside
temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is
moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature
rises above freezing.
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature
will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, when the transmission
gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h),
unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper
lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever
forward activates the rear window
washer. If the lever is pushed while on
the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
If equipped with a backup camera washer, when
the rear window washer is activated, the rear
backup camera and digital rearview mirror
(if equipped) cameras are also washed.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under
the following conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically in
the case of a cold weather manual start with full
front defrost, and when the ambient tempera-
ture is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically
when the rear defrost is turned on and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation.
If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
timer and operation will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen and on the instrument
panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1–inch Display
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Temperature Controls
Max A/C Button
Press and release to change the current
setting. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. Pressing
other setting buttons will also cause the MAX A/C
to turn off.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation
button to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode if
not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer
experience for warming, cooling, dehumidification,
etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
The AUTO button automatically controls
the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting distribution and amount of
airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be
active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. Performing this function will cause
the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes Ú page 73. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when
this feature is on. Performing this
function will cause the automatic climate controls
to change to manual mode, and the following
settings will occur:
The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on)
The rear blower is off
The air conditioning compressor is turned on
(A/C LED off)
Both driver and passenger temperature controls
are set to HI
Defrost mode is selected (LED on)
Rear defroster is turned on (LED on)
The air recirculation is turned off (LED off)
If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate
Control system will return to the previous setting.
MAX Defrost automatically turns off after
20 minutes.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button on the
climate control touchscreen to access
the rear climate controls. The Rear
Climate indicator will illuminate when the
rear climate controls are ON.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Switches
These switches provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Lift the driver’s or passenger’s side
toggle switch on the faceplate upward, or
press and slide the temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Depress the driver’s or passenger’s side
toggle switch on the faceplate downward,
or press and slide the temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front passenger temperature and
rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower
settings with the driver temperature, mode, and
blower settings. Changing the front passenger
temperature or rear passenger temperature,
mode, and blower settings while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are several blower
speeds available.
Blower speed can be controlled by lifting blower
toggle on the instrument panel to increase blower
speed, or depress the toggle for lower blower
speed.
The speed can also be selected using the blower
control buttons on the touchscreen. Use the small
blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the
large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons on the
touchscreen.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or the
faceplate, to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located next to the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
For more information on selecting modes, see
Ú page 70
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Combine Modes
Dual Level Combination
Front Defrost and Panel Mode
Tri-Level Combination
Front Defrost, Panel Mode, and Floor Mode
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1–inch Display
Rear Controls
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Rear Controls
The driver or front passenger can
combine two or three of the modes
described by selecting them
individually on their side of climate
control screen. Combine modes by
pressing each icon on the
touchscreen.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
The Three-Zone and Four-Zone ATC system allows
for adjustment of the rear climate controls from
the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the “Rear” button on the touchscreen to
display the rear climate controls. The control
functions now operate the rear system.
Press the “Front” button on the touchscreen to
return to the front climate controls.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left
and right sides of the rear passenger zones can be
adjusted separately from the front or rear ATC
panel.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current
setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will
illuminate when REAR AUTO is on. This
feature automatically controls the rear interior
cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution
and amount. Toggling this function will cause the
rear system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes Ú page 73.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out
the rear manual temperature controls
from adjusting the rear temperature and
blower settings. The LOCK REAR
indicator will illuminate when LOCK REAR is on.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release to return to the Front
Climate Control Screen.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator will illuminate
when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front passenger temperature and
rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower
settings with the driver temperature, mode, and
blower settings. Changing the front passenger
temperature or rear passenger temperature,
mode, or blower settings while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate
the amount of air forced through the rear
climate system. There are several blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Use the small blower icon (or blower icon with the
downward arrow) to reduce the blower setting, and
the large blower icon (or blower icon with the
upward arrow) to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON
To manually set the rear blower controls
to off, press the Rear Climate Control/
Blower Off button.
The rear airflow distribution modes
can be adjusted so air comes from
the headliner outlets, the floor
outlets, or both. Select the arrow
icons individually on the front climate
control screen. Combine modes by
pressing both icons.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear
right side of the third row seats and overhead
outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The
system provides heated air through the floor
outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are
located on rear of the front center console.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left
and right sides of the rear passenger zones can be
adjusted separately from the front or rear ATC
panel.
AUTO BUTTON
The AUTO button automatically controls
the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting distribution and amount of
airflow. Performing this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode
and automatic modes Ú page 73.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the left and right side of the
rear seating area with independent temperature
control.
Push the Up button on the faceplate for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the Down button on the faceplate
for cooler temperature settings.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Use the blower button with the “down”
arrow to reduce the blower setting, and
the blower button with the “up” arrow to
increase the blower setting. The rear
blower setting is shown in the display.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push the rear mode button to adjust
airflow distribution. The rear mode
settings are shown in the rear display.
The rear airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the headliner outlets,
the floor outlets, or both.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode
is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
REAR TEMPERATURE LOCK
The Rear Temperature Lock symbol on
the rear display is illuminated when the
rear controls are locked by the front
system.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen will illuminate a lock symbol
in the rear display. The rear temperature and air
source are then controlled from the front Uconnect
system.
Rear seat occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
turned off.
The rear ATC is located on the rear of the front
center console.
Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
front Uconnect touchscreen a second time to
turn the Rear Temperature Lock icon off in the
rear display.
Push a rear blower button, adjust the tempera-
ture using the rear up and down arrows, and
select a control mode to suit the rear occupant’s
needs.
ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button on
the rear climate control faceplate.
Once the desired temperature is shown on the rear
display, the ATC System will automatically achieve
and maintain that comfort level. When the system
is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel and the
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with two temperatures for the
driver and front passenger. The system will
then automatically regulate the amount of
airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
passenger, and rear temperatures. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system
will achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost
mode is selected, or by changing the front blower
knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield.
Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear
the windshield and side glass.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead (if vehicle is equipped with climate
controls).
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended. For more
information, see Ú page 405.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 396.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control system through an intake
grille, located in the right side trim panel behind
the third row seats. The heater outlets are
located in the right side trim panel, just behind
the rear doors. Do not block or place objects
directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer is a heating element
located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates auto-
matically during a cold weather manual start
with full defrost, and when the ambient
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates auto-
matically when the Rear Defrost is operating
and the ambient temperature is below 33°F
(0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C) the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will acti-
vate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the
hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and
turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper
and a lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull the
upper paddle release lever.
To open the lower storage compartment, pull the
lower paddle release lever.
Storage Compartment Release Levers
Lift upward on the larger of the release levers to
access the lower storage compartment.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push”
design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open.
Push the chrome pad on the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper
and a lower storage area.
Rear Center Console
To open the covered storage compartment, pull
the upper paddle release lever on the front of the
lid.
The storage compartment may also be lifted
forward. Pull the paddle release lever located on
the back of the console lid.
1 — Upper Compartment Release Lever
2 — Lower Compartment Release Lever
1 — Console Cupholders
2 — Open Lower Storage Area
3 — Covered Storage Compartment
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Rear Paddle Release Lever
When the second row seats are folded flat, lifting
the console forward provides a flat load floor
surface from the cargo area. There is also access
to the storage compartment from the third row.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for the second row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim
panels, and the tops of the windows are equipped
with hooks that the sun screens attach to when
pulled up.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
near the top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen over
the two hooks attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward
to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back
into the base sill.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the
center stack of the instrument panel.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console
cupholders or devices with cords routing through
upper storage area. Damage may occur to upper
console lid and device cables when upper
storage compartment is lifted forward.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The following messages will appear when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
Connecting AUX Or The External USB
Device
Use a connection cable to connect an external USB
device to the vehicle’s USB port, or use an auxiliary
cable to connect a device to the vehicle’s AUX port.
Both are located below the climate controls.
USB/AUX Ports
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will
begin charging and is ready for use with the
system. Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports
can be used at the same time but cannot be used
simultaneously while playing media. When both
Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports are in use
they will be charged at a reduced rate.
NOTE:
If the device’s battery completely discharges, it
may not communicate with the Uconnect system
until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the
device connected to the USB port may charge it to
the required level.
Using This Feature
By using a USB cable to connect an external
device:
The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing the artist, track title, and
album information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track infor-
mation may not be present on the radio display.
The device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to play and browse the contents of the
device.
The audio device battery charges when plugged
into the USB port.
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port (Standard USB)
3 — AUX Port
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
By using an auxiliary cable to connect an external
device:
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s
sound system. The Uconnect system will not
display information related to the artist, track
title, and album information.
NOTE:
When using the AUX port, the external device
cannot be controlled using the radio buttons. The
device will not charge.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Second And Third Row USB Ports
The second row USB ports can be used to charge
an external device.
Center Console Rear USB Ports
In the third row, a set of two USB ports can be used
to charge a device. These ports are charge only.
Third Row USB Ports
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a key symbol are powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, while the
outlets labeled with a battery symbol are
connected directly to the battery and powered at
all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the
fuse protecting the system needs to be
replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
1 — Charge Only Type C USB Port
2 — Charge Only Type A USB Port
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The front power outlet is located inside the storage
area on the center stack of the instrument panel,
below the climate controls.
Front Power Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right
rear cargo area when the vehicle is equipped with
three row seating. When the vehicle is equipped
with two row seating, the cargo area outlet is
located on the left side trim panel.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet (Three Row Seating)
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed from
battery powered to powered by ignition in the
ON/RUN position by switching the cargo area
power outlet fuse from F44B to F44A in the rear
power distribution center Ú page 359.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
WARNING!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15 Watt
3 Amp Qi wireless charging pad located inside of
the storage area below the climate controls. This
charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your
Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that
allows wireless charging of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
be purchased from your mobile phone provider or
a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s Owner’s Manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place,
and an LED indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device.
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign
object is detected.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All vehicle doors must be closed for the wireless
charging pad to operate.
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
If the phone moves on the pad causing the red
light to illuminate, the phone will have to be
picked up and placed back on the charging pad
to resume charging.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The power window controls, located on the driver's
door trim panel, operate the window movement for
all four power windows.
There is a single switch on the front passenger
door and rear passenger doors which operate the
windows for only that door.
Driver’s Door Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The power window switches remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition has been placed
in the OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
The window controls will operate only when
the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
The power windows may be operated from
outside of the vehicle by using the key fob. For
more information, see Ú page 18.
Automatic Window Features
Both the driver and front passenger windows, and
if equipped, both rear windows, may have
Auto-Down and Auto-Up operations.
Auto-Down Feature
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, push
the window switch down to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, lift
the window switch up to the second detent, and
release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
Front Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
Rear Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
2. Release the window switch, and within five
seconds, pull the window switch up again for
an additional two seconds.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF
SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/reading
lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
sunshade will automatically open with the sunroof
glass.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However,
the sunshade will open automatically as the
sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
DUAL PANE POWER SUNROOF —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/reading
lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/
RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by
the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops
for the sunroof open position: a comfort stop
position and a full open position. The comfort stop
position will minimize wind buffeting in the interior.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically to the comfort stop position. Push
the switch rearward and release it again to
continue to the full open position.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to open to the comfort stop position.
Push and hold the switch rearward again to
continue to open to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
position prior to the sunroof opening.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent” and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is closed, it will automatically open
to half open position prior to the roof opening to
the vent position.
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade
The sunshade has two programmed open
positions: half open and full open positions. When
operating the sunshade from the closed position,
the sunshade will always stop at the half open
position regardless of express or manual open
operation. The switch must be pushed again to
continue on to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half
open position will first automatically close the
sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second, the sunshade will open to
the half open position and stop automatically.
Push and release the switch again from the half
open position and the sunshade will open to the
full open position and stop automatically.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it
within one-half second and the sunshade will close
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the
sunshade will open to the half open position and
stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade
switch again and the sunshade will open to the full
open position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunshade will close and stop at full closed position.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in
motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open
position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located at the bottom of
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the
vehicle, move the safety latch to the left and
lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front
edge of the hood with moderate force until the
angle is below the crossover point (where the gas
props are no longer resisting) and let the hood
continue to fall closed from its own inertia.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK /OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the liftgate button on the key fob
or by pushing the electronic liftgate
release button.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
When you push the electronic liftgate release
button, either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the
doors and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock
the liftgate.
The driver's door lock cylinder will not lock or
unlock the liftgate.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by
pushing the electronic liftgate release button and
pulling upward in one fluid motion.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the
liftgate:
Manually (grab the liftgate closing handle and
pull in a downward motion)
Key fob
Hands-free (if equipped)
Liftgate close button in the cargo area
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
button located to the left of the electronic liftgate
release button, will lock the vehicle only.
If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed
by pushing the liftgate close button located in the
cargo area on the left rear trim panel, near the
liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing
the liftgate close button a second time will reverse
the liftgate operation.
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by these
fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are
operating the vehicle.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Liftgate Close Button
ADJUSTABLE POWER LIFTGATE HEIGHT
The maximum height that the liftgate will open can
be adjusted and saved so that the liftgate will only
open to the desired height. To set a desired height,
proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull
down on the liftgate to the desired height.
2. Push and hold the liftgate close button,
located on the left side trim panel inside the
cargo area, for three seconds. An audible
chime will be heard to let you know the height
has been saved.
To set the saved height setting to a new setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate, then manually push the
liftgate upward to its full open position.
2. Manually pull the liftgate down to the new
desired height and hold the liftgate close
button for three seconds until the audible
chime is heard.
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, the liftgate can be released by
accessing the service release feature in the
latch. This can be done using a 3 mm
diameter screwdriver.
Liftgate Service Release
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen.
Place the screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the
lever and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free
activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion
under the vehicle activation zone in the general
location below the rear license plate. The
activation zone is about 1.8 ft (0.5 m) from side to
side. Do not move your foot sideways or in a
sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the
motion.
NOTE:
The activation zone is the same for vehicles
equipped with or without a trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and
the liftgate will open after approximately one
second, or close after approximately three
seconds. These settings can be enabled or
disabled through Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
NOTE:
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate
requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate handle. If a valid Passive
Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the lift-
gate will not respond to any kicks.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned
on or off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be
turned off during jacking, tire changing, manual
car wash, and vehicle service.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be acti-
vated by any metallic object making a similar
in-and-out motion under the rear fascia/
bumper, such as cleaning using a metal broom.
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when
the transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate
while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will
automatically reverse to the closed/open posi-
tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere
along these strips will cause the liftgate to
return to the open position.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the system
will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate
must be operated manually.
The power liftgate will release, but not power
open, in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C).
Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before opening the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time (approximately one hour), the liftgate
may need to be closed manually to reset power
liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation
mode.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the
props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and
stop the power operation or reverse its direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage
The load floor is designed for a maximum load of
300 lb (136 kg).
There is a removable storage bin located on the
left side of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found under the storage
lid. To access the lower storage, lift the handle and
raise the storage lid.
Lift Storage Lid Handle
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area
sides, should be used to safely secure loads when
the vehicle is moving.
NOTE:
The cargo tie-downs are designed for a maximum
load of 300 lb (136 kg).
Tie-Down Hooks (Vehicles With Third Row Seating)
Tie-Down Hooks (Vehicles Without Third Row Seating)
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel
path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed
and latched before driving away.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting
or protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grab the cover at the center handle and pull
over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo
cover in place.
Rear Cargo Cover
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and allow
the child seat to come loose. A child could be
badly injured. Use only the anchors provided
for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the rear
cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended
for load carrying purposes only, not for
passengers, who should sit in seats and use
seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow these
guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left
door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor.
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward
as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
stop or accident.
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a
sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle.
Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its
mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Foldable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting
or protect passengers from loose cargo.
Foldable Cargo Area Cover
To cover the cargo area:
1. Remove the folded cover from the storage
pouch, and unfold using a twisting motion.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots on each side of the pillar trim.
Step 2
3. Hook the straps to the outside post of the rear
head restraint on each side.
Step 3
NOTE:
The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
To store the foldable cargo area cover, reverse the
installation steps and replace the cover into its
storage pouch.
Folding The Cargo Cover
1 — Remove Cover From Vehicle
2 — Twist Cover
3 — Push Twisted Cover Inward
4 — Place Folded Cover In Pouch
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a
sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle.
Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its
mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
2
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry
loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
should be uniformly distributed over the luggage
rack crossbars.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer to order and install
Mopar® crossbars built specifically for this roof
rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure
the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that
on the external rack does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity. Place one crossbar in the
forward position. Place the rear crossbar in one of
the two rear optional positions based on the load
being secured.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments,
located at the upper edge of each crossbar,
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft
wrench provided with the Mopar® crossbars.
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame.
Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
retighten with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
position.
NOTE:
If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed over
the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio reception.
For improved satellite radio reception, place the
rear crossbar in the forward of the two rear
crossbar positions.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle,
do not carry any loads on the roof rack without
the crossbars installed. The load should be
secured and placed on top of the crossbars,
not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to
place the load on the roof, place a blanket or
some other protection between the load and
the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
with large frontal area should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
large flat loads and may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
The use of vehicle systems that would adjust
the ride heights (such as Selec-Terrain modes
Rock or Mud) is not recommended when using
the Roof Luggage Rack to carry a load.
CAUTION!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
95
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
3. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illu-
minate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 353.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Analog to Digital.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illu-
minate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 353.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Arrow Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
Up
Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu.
2. OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item. Push and hold the OK button for
one second to reset displayed/selected fea-
tures that can be reset.
3. MENU Button
Push the MENU button to access/select the in-
formation screens or submenu screens of the
Home Screen display. Push and hold the OK
button to enter edit mode.
4. Left Arrow Button
Push the left arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or submenu
item.
5. Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu.
6. Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Display Options
Holding OK will also allow you to change your
display to Digital or Analog.
Digital theme will be the default theme
Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press
OK to reactivate
Speedometer must always be present
Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up
info will still be displayed in the main screen
area (In this case the speed moves to the top)
Custom Tile Configuration
To customize the instrument cluster further, you
are able to select up to five tiles to display
information based on your needs.
Press the MENU button for the Home Screen
display
Menu Button
Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired Tile
Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the
selected submenu and press OK again to add
your selection to your tile view
The main menu options are Main Menu, Vehicle
Info, Navigation, Audio, and Off Road
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center portion of the cluster and consist of multiple
sections:
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in black under normal conditions,
yellow for non critical warnings and red for crit-
ical warnings
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are
submenus available, the position within the
submenus is shown here
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp,
Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel
Economy, Current Fuel Economy and Time)
Air Suspension Status — If Equipped
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display
the main menu or the screens of a selected feature
of the main menu. The main display area also
displays pop-up messages that consist of
approximately 60 possible warning or information
messages. These pop-up messages fall into
several categories:
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then returns to
the previous screen. Most of the messages of
this type are then stored (as long as the condi-
tion that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.
Examples of this message type are “Right Front
Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or
until the condition that activated the message is
cleared. Examples of this message type are
“Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on) and
“Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle with the
lights on).
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed
until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of
this message type are “Remote Start Canceled -
Door Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push
Button to Start.”
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then returns to
the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the OK or arrow buttons. To reset the
oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric
display will update to show 100%. If conditions
are not met a pop-up message of “To reset oil
life engine must be off with ignition in run” will
be displayed (for five seconds), and the user
will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
Includes the following, but not limited to:
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green or red telltales area on the right.
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
Doors Open Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled Traction Control Off
Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low
Hood Open Oil Change Due Fuel Low
Shift Not Allowed Service Anti-lock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control
Service Shifter Service Power Steering Cruise Off
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Cruise Ready ACC Override
Service Transmission Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h Cruise Set To XXX km/h
Liftgate Open Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) Service Tire Pressure System
Door Open Park Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low
Service Air Bag Warning Light Lights On Engine Temperature Hot
Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Service Air Bag System Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open Ignition or Accessory On Vehicle Not In Park
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Door Open Close Fuel Door
Check The Rear Seat
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
the main menu items for several features. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll through
the driver interactive display menu options until
the desired menu is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
Home Screen
Press the Menu button to display the Home
Screen.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to highlight the desired selection. Push and
release the OK button to select. Press the up or
down arrow button to select a different screen
within the selected category. If the Menu button is
pressed in this view, the instrument cluster will
return to the previously displayed screen.
Home Screen Options
Main Menu
Speedometer
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Night Vision — If Equipped
Vehicle Info
Fuel Economy
Gauge Summary
Oil Life
Tire Pressure
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Trip
Trip A
Trip B
Navigation
Map Display
Off Road
Terrain Status — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics
Pitch & Roll
Stored Messages
Messages
Settings
Screen Setup
Head Up Display — If Equipped
MAIN MENU
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Drive menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Speedometer menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the OK button to toggle units (mph or
km/h) of the speedometer. Hold the OK button to
toggle between Analog and Digital speedometer.
Night Vision — If Equipped
While viewing the Speedometer menu
title, push and release the left or
right arrow button until the Night
Vision menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Pedestrian/Animal icons will be
displayed in the top left location Ú page 180.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Driver Assist — If Equipped
While viewing the Speedometer menu title, push
and release the left or right arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. The Driver Assist
screen indicates the current status of ACC, Active
Lane Management and Active Driving Assist/
Assist+/Pilot. Push and release the OK button
again to change between Zoomed In and Zoomed
Out view (“Press OK to Zoom In” will display when
in Zoomed Out view/“Press OK to Zoom Out” will
display when in Zoomed In view).
VEHICLE INFO
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push the left or
right arrow button to scroll through the
information submenus.
Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Current Fuel Economy
Range To Empty
Press the OK button to reset the average fuel
economy
NOTE:
The Range feature is not able to be reset through
the instrument cluster display controls.
Gauge Summary
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Displays the current temperature of the coolant.
Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Battery Voltage
Displays the current voltage level of the battery.
Oil Life
Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner of the icon.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and
the tire pressure values in each corner of the
icon with the pressure value of the low tire are
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function, and
cannot be reset Ú page 264.
Stop/Start Status — If Equipped
Display current status of Stop/Start system.
TRIP
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Navigation display title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
OFF ROAD
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off Road Menu title is highlighted.
Push the left or right arrow button to scroll
the submenus.
Terrain Status — If Equipped
Selec-Terrain Status
Air Suspension Status
Vehicle Dynamics
Wheel Articulation
Transfer Case Status — If Equipped
Steering Angle
Sway Bar Status — If Equipped
Axle Lock Status — If Equipped
Pitch And Roll
Vehicle Pitch
Vehicle Roll
AUDIO
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. This menu will
display the audio source information, including the
Song name, Artist name, and audio source with an
accompanying graphic.
STORED MESSAGES
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the left or
right arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
SETTINGS
NOTE:
The Head Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped feature
Settings are available at any vehicle speed
Ú page 107.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the OK button to enter the submenus and follow
the prompts on the screen as needed. The Settings
feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
Upper Left
None
Fuel Economy
Current
Time
Outside Temp Trip B Distance
Fuel Economy
Average
Range To
Empty (RTE)
Compass Trip A Distance
Upper Right
None
Fuel Economy
Current
Time
Outside Temp Trip B Distance
Fuel Economy
Average
Range To
Empty (RTE)
Compass Trip A Distance
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Current Gear
On
Off
Tachometer — Digital Theme Only
Show with Digital Theme
Hide with Digital Theme
Odometer
Show
Hide
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button to
choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Restore
Cancel
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The HUD feature Settings are available at any
vehicle speed.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the left or right arrow button
until the HUD Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter HUD. Use the up or
down arrow button to select a setting, then
push and release the OK button to adjust the
setting.
ON/OFF
HUD ON/OFF
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will
display on the windshield. When it is not
selected, it will not display on the windshield.
Content and Layout
Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
Favorite Menus
Main Menu
Trip
(Show/Hide)
Off Road
(Show/Hide)
Vehicle Info
Navigation
(Show/Hide)
Messages
Audio
(Show/Hide)
Settings
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Standard Mode
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD
image is split into thirds with the speed limit
indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the
center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right.
Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane
Management, Active Driving Assist), Gear
Advanced Mode
When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD
displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn naviga-
tion, speed limit, driver assist function(s), and
current gear.
Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane
Management, Active Driving Assist)
Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane
Management, Active Driving Assist), Gear
Display Height
Brightness
NOTE:
The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display
Height and Non Custom layouts), are controlled
through the Settings Screen in the Instrument
Cluster Ú page 99.
NOTE:
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will
not display while in the Settings menu.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 111.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of the charging system. The charging system is
still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt,
115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain driving
conditions (city driving, towing, frequent
stopping, etc.).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips, and if the evaluation and driving pattern of
the vehicle did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional
and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Active Driving Assist - Driver
Inattentiveness Warning Light
This light illuminates when driver
inattentiveness has been continually
detected, warning the driver to place
their hands on the steering wheel.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected
at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 142.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool;
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 326.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Night Vision Animal Warning Light
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light
will illuminate in red when an animal is
detected directly in the vehicle’s path,
near the headlights, and a collision is
possible Ú page 180.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up
may display when a detection occurs.
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning
Light will illuminate in red when a
pedestrian is detected directly in the
vehicle’s path, near the headlights, and a
collision is possible Ú page 180.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up
may display when a detection occurs.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat belt
is unbuckled in the second row. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
position, and if a seat belt in the second
row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the
specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion
of the instrument cluster display, momentarily
replacing the configurable corner information. If a
second row seat belt that was buckled at the start
of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the
unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound
Ú page 269.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound
and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound Ú page 269.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Active Driving Assist - Driver
Inattentiveness Warning Light
This light illuminates when driver
inattentiveness has been detected,
warning the driver to place their hands on
the steering wheel.
Active Driving Assist Fault Warning Light
This light will turn on when the Active
Driving Assist system has detected a
fault.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a
fault detected in the air suspension
system.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should
go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it
was turned off previously.
Service Active Lane Management Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Active Lane Management system is not
operating and requires service. Please
see an authorized dealer.
Active Lane Management Warning Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning
Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle
is approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the vehicle is
crossing the lane marker Ú page 173.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light will
turn on and a chime will sound. The light
will remain on until fuel is added.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 342.
Night Vision Animal Warning Light
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light
will illuminate in yellow when an animal is
approaching or is in the vehicle’s path
Ú page 180.
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning
Light will illuminate in yellow when a
pedestrian is approaching or is in the
vehicle’s path Ú page 180.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service
Ú page 145.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service Ú page 261.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a
fault in the sway bar disconnect system
Ú page 136.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is actively adjusting
the ride height Ú page 138.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Aerodynamic setting Ú page 138.
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light—
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle
is automatically lowered from ride height
position downward for easy entry and exit
of the vehicle.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road
1 setting Ú page 138.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road
2 setting Ú page 138.
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will
illuminate if a fault is detected, it will be
indicated by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator
light that will stay on as long as the fault
condition exists.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that FCW is off Ú page 261.
Max Payload Exceeded Indicator Light
This light indicates that the maximum
payload may have been exceeded or load
leveling cannot be achieved at its current
ride height.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear driveshafts
are disengaged from the powertrain.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front sway bar is disconnected
Ú page 136.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 134.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Driving Assist - Driver Attentive
Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the system
detects that the driver is attentive and is
actively steering the vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
the vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 145.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
the vehicle in front is not detected
Ú page 145.
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a
complete stop without you having to keep
your foot on the brake pedal. Once
engaged a green “HOLD” indicator will
appear in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed Ú page 144.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 58.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator
light illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” and ready to
provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs Ú page 173.
Night Vision Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night
Vision Warning System status is Active
Ú page 180.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 58.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat belt
has been buckled in the second row. A
telltale will display in the upper right
corner of the instrument cluster display
to correspond to the specific seating position once
the seat belt has been buckled Ú page 269.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode Ú page 143.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Driving Assist On Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the system is
turned on, but is not actively providing
steering to the vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set Ú page 145.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 144.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the
4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear
passenger seats are unoccupied, and will
illuminate in the upper right portion of
the instrument cluster display,
momentarily replacing the configurable corner
information.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec-Speed
Control is activated.
To activate Selec-Speed Control, assure
the vehicle is 4WD Low and push the button on the
Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Night
Vision Warning System status is
Suppressed Ú page 180.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be driveable and not need towing, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 203.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your
seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or
PARK (P) position before you can start the engine.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
gear.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
in the passenger compartment.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the OFF position, key fob is removed from
the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
WARNING!
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the engine will shut off. The ignition will
remain in the ON/RUN position until the gear
selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the
ON/RUN position. If vehicle speed drops below
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark
Ú page 123.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,
ON/RUN, and START. To change the ignition
positions without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to return the ignition to the OFF
position.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could
be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same
time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simul-
taneously, a warning message will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 95.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK (P) should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back-up system and should not be relied upon as
the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your
vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed
transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to the ON/RUN position. After 30 minutes
the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless
the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed
transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases,
the gear selector must be returned to “P” to select
desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when
both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the "Normal Starting" procedure and has not
experienced an extended park condition (i.e.,
parked for more than 30 days), it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is
flooded. The starter motor will engage
automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal and brake pedal, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/
h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can
roll. As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F O R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is coiled and
strapped right behind the engine air cleaner filter
assembly from the manufacturer.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of
local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is
a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur
Ú
page 343.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check your
oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the
break-in period. Add oil as required.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 323.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use non-detergent oil or straight mineral
oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure the parking brake is
applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the parking brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect settings.
The parking brake switch is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel
(below the headlamp switch).
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking brake
engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,
the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster
and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If
your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the
parking brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be
applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but
the BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate,
however, it can only be released when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extin-
guish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever
the transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your
foot on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch
down momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake
disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE telltale light
in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on
the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
(Continued)
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on
the EPB switch for as long as engagement is
desired. The BRAKE telltale light will illuminate,
and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is
in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the parking
brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain
engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB
system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
AUTO PARK BRAKE
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a
standstill and the transmission is placed in PARK.
Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
customer selection through the customer
programmable features section of the Uconnect
Settings Ú page 219.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always turn the igni-
tion OFF, secure the key fob, and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to
the brake system. Be sure the parking brake is
fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
SAFEHOLD
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that
will place the transmission in PARK, and engage
the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of
the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h)
or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and
back to ON again.
HOLD ‘N GO — IF EQUIPPED
Hold ‘N Go is a comfort feature that allows the
driver to remove their foot from the brake pedal
once the vehicle has come to a stop. The vehicle
must be held at a standstill for a predetermined
amount of time by hydraulic braking. The EPB will
then engage and continue to hold the vehicle at a
stop until the driver applies the accelerator pedal.
Hold ‘N Go can be activated or deactivated by
pushing the HOLD button located on the switch
bank.
HOLD Switch
The following conditions must be met for
Hold ‘N Go to activate:
Driver’s door is closed
Driver's seat belt is fastened
Vehicle is at a standstill
Forward gear is selected
ACC is not engaged
EPB is not applied
ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto
parking maneuver is not activated
BRAKE MAINTENANCE MODE
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. You should only enter Brake
Maintenance Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the EPB
system, this can only be done after retracting the
EPB actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can
be done easily by entering the Brake Maintenance
Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
Maintenance Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Maintenance Mode, the EPB fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
(Continued)
(Continued)
When brake maintenance work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK without blinking.
Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped,
and the PARK position is properly indicated,
before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF position. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is
in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in the ON/RUN
position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The
brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both above the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the steering wheel
mounted paddle shifters. Pulling the -/+ switches
(on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position
will select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear limit in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current
gear, while in AutoStick mode.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE (D) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear
range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, rotate the shifter all
the way counterclockwise until the indicator
displays PARK.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK (P) if you must exit the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 133. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
warm. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing see Ú page 196.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle see Ú page 329.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance. This feature can also provide
you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
AutoStick Paddle Shifters
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, tap one of the paddle
shifters on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-)
paddle shifters to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear,
while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will
retain the current gear. The current transmission
gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, you can use the paddle shifters,
to manually shift the transmission. Tapping the (-)
paddle shifters, will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear. Tapping the (+) paddle
shifters, will upshift the transmission to the next
highest gear.
NOTE:
The paddle shifters (if equipped) may be disabled
(or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect
Programmable Settings.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except
as follows.
The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans-
mission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed, will downshift
the transmission to the lowest gear possible at
the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected. The
vehicle will force an upshift, but it will stay in
AutoStick mode.
To disengage AutoStick mode, push and hold the
(+) paddle shifters until "D" is once again indicated
in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of
AutoStick mode at any time without taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. When activated, the engine and
transmission, steering and suspension (if
equipped with air suspension) are all set to their
SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified transmission shift
points as well as firmer suspension and steering
for an enhanced driving experience. This mode
may be activated and deactivated by pushing the
SPORT ON button on the instrument panel switch
bank or by selecting SPORT mode using the
Selec-Terrain switch (if equipped). When Sport
Mode has been activated an indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
The driveline is equipped with a Front Axle
Disconnect (FAD) for the one-speed and two-speed
drivelines. The FAD operation is fully automated
and controlled by the Drivetrain Control Module
(DTCM). It does not require any customer input to
engage. The FAD is set to connect, disconnect and
provide 4WD function based on certain set
conditions detected by the DTCM, including but not
limited to the following:
Ambient temperature
Wipers
Selec-Terrain Mode selection
Wheel-slip detection
The FAD is actuated only in 4WD HI range and
stays connected for 4WD LOW.
QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which enables on-demand
four-wheel drive with active torque management.
No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) system, which combines
standard ABS and Traction Control, provides
resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow
additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
conditions where 4WD LOW range is recom-
mended Ú page 200.
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II system comes equipped with a
customer-selectable electronically operated
on-demand transfer case with active torque
management in all driveable ranges. This transfer
case provides the following operating range
positions:
4WD HI
N (NEUTRAL)
4WD LOW
When additional tractive effort and torque are
required, the 4WD LOW position can be used. The
4WD LOW position is intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOW
position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to driveline
components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the normal 4WD HI position at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect performance and function of the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each four-wheel drive system mode position,
see the information below:
4WD HI
This is the default operating range for daily use.
N (NEUTRAL)
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle Ú page 196.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which allows
for increased torque to be delivered to both the
front and rear wheels while providing maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N), push and hold the
4WD LOW button until the 4WD LOW indicator light
begins to flash in the instrument cluster. When the
shift is complete, the 4WD LOW indicator light will
remain on solid.
4WD LOW Button
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Complete 4WD Shift Put Transmission In Neutral”
or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Speed Must Be Below
3 MPH” or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Allow Engine
To Return To Idle” message will flash from the
instrument cluster display Ú page 99.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position
or the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), push and hold the 4WD LOW button
until the 4WD LOW indicator light begins to flash in
the instrument cluster. When the shift is complete,
the 4WD LOW indicator light will remain off.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met —
“4WD Shift Cancelled” or “4WD Shift Aborted/
Retry Shift” message will be displayed on the
instrument cluster. To reattempt shift, put the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and push and hold
the 4WD LOW button.
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Complete 4WD Shift Put Transmission In
Neutral” or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Speed
Must Be Below 3 MPH” or a “To Complete 4WD
Shift Allow Engine To Return To Idle” message
will flash from the instrument cluster display
Ú page 99.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth
not being properly aligned. Several attempts
may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling
0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is
moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer
case will not allow the shift.
QUADRA-TRAC II SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II System features two torque
transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle
and the Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The ELSD
axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input
to operate. Under normal driving conditions, the
unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque
evenly between left and right wheels. With a
traction difference between left and right wheels,
the coupling will sense a speed difference. As one
wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque
will automatically transfer from the wheel that has
less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While
the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design,
their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II
transfer case shifting information, preceding this
section, for shifting this system.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system
allows greater front suspension travel in off-road
situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
located on the instrument panel (to the right of the
gear selector).
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system.
Push the switch again to deactivate the system.
The Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is
disconnected. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will
flash during activation transition, or when
activation conditions are not met.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in on-road
mode during normal driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to 4WD
LOW and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the
off-road position Ú page 134. The Sway Bar
Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer/sway
bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences.
This condition is due to driving surface differences
or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway
bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left
halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment
may require that the vehicle be driven onto level
ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR
switch again.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to
provide the best performance for all terrains. Tap
the toggle up or down to cycle through the
positions.
Selec-Terrain
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected
before driving on hard surfaced roads or at
speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute
to the loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury. Under certain circumstances,
the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle
stability and assists with vehicle control. The
system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt
to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds
over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to
return to off-road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
on-road mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will
flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle
stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving
faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute
to the loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
1 — Selec-Terrain Positions
2 — Selec-Terrain Toggle
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
ROCK – Off-road calibration is only available in
4WD LOW. The vehicle is raised (if equipped
with air suspension) for improved ground clear-
ance. Traction-based tuning with improved
steerability for use on high traction off-road
surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as
large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air
suspension, the vehicle level will change to
Off-Road 2 (OR2). If the Selec-Terrain switch is
in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is
switched from 4WD LOW to 4WD HI, the
Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO.
SAND/MUD – Off-road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud or sand. Driveline
is maximized for traction. Some binding may be
felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Off-Road 1 (OR1).
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off-road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in
SNOW mode (depending on certain operating
conditions), the transmission may use SECOND
gear (rather than FIRST gear) during launches,
to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air
suspension, the default ride height for SNOW is
Normal Ride Height (NRH).
AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off-road.
Balances traction with seamless steering feel to
provide improved handling and acceleration
over two-wheel drive vehicles. If the suspension
is already in OR1 or OR2, the vehicle will not
lower to NRH with Auto selection as to maintain
capability.
NOTE:
If equipped with air suspension, the level will only
raise to Normal Ride Height (NRH) in the AUTO
mode. If the vehicle is in OR1 or OR2 the height will
not lower automatically until defined speed
thresholds are exceeded.
SPORT – This mode is only available in 4WD HI.
When activated, the engine and transmission,
steering and suspension (if equipped with air
suspension) are all set to their SPORT settings.
SPORT mode will provide improved throttle
response and modified transmission shift
points as well as firmer suspension and
steering, the vehicle will also be dropped to Aero
Height for an enhanced driving experience.
When SPORT mode has been activated, an indi-
cator light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 99.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system provides
full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of vehicle height adjustment by a toggle
switch. The vehicle will automatically raise and
lower the ride height to adapt to the appropriate
driving conditions. At higher speeds, the vehicle
will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and when
operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will raise
the ride height accordingly. The buttons near the
terrain switch in the center console area can be
used to set preferred ride height to match the
appropriate conditions.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Quadra-Lift Switch
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Non-TrailHawk Raises the
vehicle approximately 2.4 inches [60 mm])
(TrailHawk Raises the vehicle approximately
3.0 inches 75 mm]) – This position is intended
for off-roading use only where maximum ground
clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the
UP button twice from the NRH position or once
from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the
vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
OR1 Ú page 200.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle
approximately 1.6 inches [40 mm]) – This is the
primary position for all off-road driving until OR2
is needed. Push the UP button once from the
NRH position while the vehicle speed is below
38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if
the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph
(64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be automat-
ically lowered to NRH Ú page 200.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) 0.0 inches (0 mm) –
This is the standard position of the suspension
and is meant for normal driving.
Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle
approximately -0.8 inches [-21 mm] Front
and -1.0 inches [-25 mm] Rear) – This position
provides improved aerodynamics by lowering
the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
Aero when the vehicle speed remains between
62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h)
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle
will return to NRH from Aero if the vehicle speed
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and
35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds
or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph
(48 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero, regard-
less of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in SPORT
mode.
Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle
approximately -1.8 inches [-46 mm] Front
and -2.0 inches [-50 mm] Rear) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit, push the DOWN
button twice from NRH while the vehicle speed
is below 6 mph (10 km/h). To exit Entry/Exit,
push the UP button twice while in Entry/Exit or
drive the vehicle over 6 mph (10 km/h).
1 — Off-Road 2 Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
2 — Off-Road 1 Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Aero Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
6 — Toggle Switch
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch-
screen Radio by selecting the “Auto Entry/Exit”
setting. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will
only lower if the gear selector is in PARK, the
terrain switch is in AUTO, the transfer case is in
AUTO and the vehicle level is either in Normal or
Aero Height. The vehicle will not automatically
lower to Entry/Exit height if the air suspension level
is in OR2 or OR1. If the vehicle is equipped with
Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will be
suppressed when the ignition is switched OFF and
the door is open to prevent setting the alarm off.
The Selec-Terrain system will automatically change
the vehicle to the proper height based on the
position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can
be changed from the default Selec-Terrain setting
by normal use of the air suspension buttons
Ú page 137.
The system requires that the engine be running for
all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the
doors must be closed. If a door is opened at any
time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
not be completed until the open door(s) is/are
closed.
The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system uses a
lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming
traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the
vehicle will move up first and then the front. When
lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first
and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that
the air suspension system operates briefly; this is
normal. The system is correcting the position of the
vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system has a feature
which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 204.
NOTE:
Default Ride Height:
Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the
default for all vehicle speeds and operation.
This is the selected height that the suspension
will level for speed changes (e.g. raising from
Entry/Exit Height at speed, lowering from Off
Road Height at speed, etc.).
Default ride height can be changed by manually
adjusting the ride height switch to Normal Ride
Height or Aero Height and staying in the
selected height for 2.5 seconds. It will be stored
as the default ride height and the height will be
maintained until a new default ride height is
selected.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio Ú page 204.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to
protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled Ú page 204.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
authorized dealer for service.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air
suspension system has a feature which
automatically lowers the vehicle to Entry/Exit ride
height Ú page 204.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle into
Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load
leveling system Ú page 204.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows
you to only display suspension warnings
Ú page 204.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
must be enabled Ú page 204.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio Ú page 204.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 99.
OPERATION
The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to
show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing
indicator lamps will show a position which the
system is working to achieve. When raising, if
multiple indicator lamps are flashing while raising,
the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
multiple indicators are flashing while lowering, the
lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the
system is working to achieve.
Toggle up once will move the suspension one
position higher from the current position,
assuming all conditions are met (i.e. ignition on,
speed below threshold, etc). Toggle up can be
pushed multiple times. Each toggle up will raise
the requested level by one position up to a
maximum position of OR2 or the highest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
speed, etc).
Toggle down once will move the suspension one
position lower from the current level, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. ignition on, doors closed,
speed below threshold, etc). Toggle down can be
pushed multiple times. Each toggle down will lower
the requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Entry/Exit Height or the lowest
position allowed based on current conditions (i.e.
vehicle speed, etc.)
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The
indicator lamps and instrument cluster display
messages will operate the same for automatic
changes and user requested changes.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 1 through 5
will be illuminated.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 2 through 5
will be illuminated.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 3
through 5 will be illuminated.
Aero Height– Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illu-
minated.
Entry/Exit Height– Indicator lamp 5 will be illu-
minated.
Transport Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be illumi-
nated. Driving above 3 mph (5 km/h) or dese-
lecting setting in the radio will disable Transport
Mode.
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 through 5
will be illuminated. Driving above 5 mph
(8 km/h) or deselecting setting in the radio will
disable Tire/Jack Mode.
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3
through 5 will be illuminated. Driving above
5 mph (8 km/h) or deselecting setting in the
radio will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The system
is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system provides
enhanced vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assistance to provide light effort while
parking and a good feel while driving. If the electric
power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assistance, you will still
have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts (Normal,
Comfort and Sport) can be selected through the
Uconnect System Ú page 204. If SPORT mode is
selected, steering efforts are optimized for sporty
driving.
If the Electric Power Steering warning
icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE
SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service
Ú page 110.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, they
indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may
have occurred which caused an over temperature
condition in the electric power steering system.
Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let
the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon
and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically
re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded
engine parts, to handle the additional engine
starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 99.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed
in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start
Screen. In the following situations, the engine will
not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an
off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if
equipped).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been
achieved from previous Autostop.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an
off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if
equipped).
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode
will be disabled Ú page 99.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the
ON mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and
back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
instrument cluster display Ú page 99.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Your vehicle is equipped with the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system which will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving
Assist (ADA) system:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used when
ACC is not enabled, and functions as normal
cruise control.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehi-
cles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of
the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
(Continued)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC
utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead
of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving
Assist system, Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC
not enabled) will not detect vehicles directly
ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected Ú page 410.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stationary vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
and hold the vehicle in the stop position
for approximately 10 minutes when
following a vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead does not start moving within
10 minutes, the parking brake will be acti-
vated, and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING!
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Driving Assist Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current system settings for Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC), Active Lane Management (ALM), and the
Active Driving Assist (ADA) systems. The
information it displays depends on ACC, ALM, and
ADA system statuses.
Pushing the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) buttons
will display one of the following messages in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC: XX mph (km/h)”.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off”.
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
(If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) is used
without ACC enabled. To change between Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) and Fixed Speed Cruise
Control features, first turn off ACC by pushing the
ACC on/off button. Then, turn on Fixed Speed
Cruise Control by pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel-
erator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system
will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are too close to the
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to
a complete stop longer than two seconds, the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button or press the accelerator pedal to reen-
gage the ACC system.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or
SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target
Detected Indicator Light, and the system will adjust
the vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 147.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active
when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if
the vehicle ahead starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than
two seconds, the system will hold brake pres-
sure for up to 10 minutes. If no driver action is
taken after the 10 minutes, the Electric Park
Brake will be applied and the ACC system will
cancel.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill
(or the vehicle is traveling below 3 mph (5 km/
h), and the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the Electric Park Brake
will be applied and the ACC system will cancel.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
the above message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display, and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there
may be an internal system fault or a temporary
malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If
this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following
an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using
ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no vehicle in
front detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve
the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
following lane changing example, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not
detect the vehicle until it is too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a
vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following exits
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data
when the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to
detect recognizable road signs such as:
Speed limits
School zones
No passing zones
NOTE:
The TSA system will automatically display the
detected road sign using the unit of measure-
ment (mph or km/h) selected within the instru-
ment cluster display.
If no speed limit signs are detected, the system
will revert to the speed limit signs that are
stored in the Navigation system.
The system always checks the traffic signs indi-
cating the current speed limit. The system is
able to recognize and display up to two different
road signs in the instrument cluster display.
These road signs can be found on the Driver
Assist page.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACTIVATION /DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within
the Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver
Assistance menu. System ON is signaled by road
signs shown on the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will
be displayed when the driver selects it on the
HOME screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that
are available through the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the
driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a
graphic in the instrument cluster display.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will
alert the driver when the current speed of the
vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit by
showing a graphic in the instrument cluster
display, and by sounding an audible alert. The
audible alert will last for 10 seconds, and the
visual alert will remain on as long as the vehicle is
exceeding the speed limit.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will
not show any traffic signs (unless selected in the
HOME screen, which will show detected speed
limit signs), and no alerts will be issued to the
driver.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument
cluster display, and can display any combination of
signs at one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and
supplemental info, and “Do Not Pass” signs)
depending on what information is available.
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than
the current speed limit, the display will update
along with an “up” arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than
the current speed limit, the display will update
along with a “down” arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
seconds.
Traffic Signs Recognized
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed along
with a newly detected speed limit indicating
special circumstances the driver should be aware
of. Available supplemental information includes:
School
Construction
Rain
Snow
Fog
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental
Information (School Zone)
2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
(Continued)
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed
when the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed
speed limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign
on the instrument cluster display will show a red
outline to alert the driver.
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined
with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and
centers the vehicle in the driving lane while
traveling at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system
limitations, see Ú page 145.
NOTE:
The driver should always obey traffic laws and
speed limits. Never drive above applicable
speed limit restrictions.
The driver can override ADA at any time by
braking, accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long
as the set distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front is maintained. ADA will also keep
your vehicle centered between the lane lines, and
monitor for other vehicles in adjacent lanes by
utilizing the Blind Spot Monitoring sensors.
Two types of Active Driving Assist systems are
available:
Base ADA system
Hands-Free ADA system
Base Active Driving Assist System — If Equipped
The Base ADA system uses sensors within the
steering wheel to measure driver attentiveness,
and requires that the driver have their hands on
the steering wheel at all times.
The system will generally aim to keep the vehicle
centered in the lane, but when the driver turns the
steering wheel (e.g. to move further away from a
large vehicle in the next lane) the system will
reduce its control and enter "co-steering" mode.
While in co-steering mode, the system will provide
reduced assistance and allow the driver to control
the path of the vehicle. Once the driver stops
providing input to the steering wheel, the system
will require a few seconds to fully resume lane
centering assistance, especially during curves.
CAUTION!
Traffic Sign Assist is designed to assist the
driver and not to substitute the driver. It is the
driver’s responsibility to continue to monitor
the vehicle speed.
Functionality may be limited or the system
may not work if the sensor is obstructed.
The system may have limited operation or not
work at all in weather conditions such as
heavy rain, hail, and thick fog. Strong light
contrasts can influence the recognition capa-
bility of the sensor.
The area surrounding the sensor must not be
covered with stickers or any other object.
Do not tamper or perform any operations in
the area of the windshield glass directly
surrounding the sensor.
Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use
specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid
scratching the windshield.
CAUTION!
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist System —
If Equipped
The Hands-Free ADA system uses sensors within
the steering wheel and a driver monitoring camera
located on top of the steering column to monitor
driver attentiveness. The Hands-Free ADA allows
the driver to remove their hands from the steering
wheel, but requires that the driver continue to pay
attention to the road.
NOTE:
The camera may record images of the driver during
certain crash, or near crash situations. To retrieve
the images recorded by the camera, special
equipment is required and access to the vehicle or
the camera is needed.
Hands-Free ADA will also change lanes when a turn
signal is activated if the lane in the direction
indicated is valid and clear, noted by a dashed line
in the direction of the available lane change. The
system uses sensors, including Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) sensors, to determine if a lane
change is possible. If the assisted lane change is in
progress, a green indication will appear.
Assisted Lane Change (Green)
NOTE:
The Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is
only available on approved roadways. Please
consult the Jeep® website for further details on
supported roadways.
The Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system
requires an active subscription through Jeep®
Connect (Uconnect Connected Services)
package. If the ADA on/off button is pushed
without an active subscription, the instrument
cluster display will show the message “Active
Driving Assist Unavailable Update Subscrip-
tion”. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
If previously disabled, activating the Hands-Free
Active Driving Assist system will also activate
the Forward Collision Warning and Pedestrian
Emergency Braking systems Ú page 261.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Jeep®
Connect (Uconnect Connected Services)
package, additional data may be collected
through the Jeep® Connect (Uconnect
Connected Services) system. This includes
information about the vehicle’s operation, a
collision involving the vehicle, the use of the
vehicle and its features, and in certain situa-
tions, the location and approximate GPS speed
of the vehicle. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement for Terms and Conditions
and Privacy Statements.
Vehicle data may be read from the Hands-Free
ADA system with special equipment and access
to the vehicle or the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
WARNING!
The driver is always responsible for determining
if a lane change is safe. Failure to follow this
warning can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
(Continued)
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST ON
O
R OFF
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
To enable the Active Driving Assist system,
proceed as follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button
located on the right side of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel image will display
white in the instrument cluster display until
the system is engaged. If ACC was previously
disabled, pushing this button will activate
BOTH ACC and Active Driving Assist systems.
2. If ACC was active and engaged before pushing
the ADA on/off button, ACC will remain
engaged and ADA will become enabled and
then engaged (once all other conditions are
met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA
on/off button, push the SET (+) button or the
SET (-) button and release when the desired
driving speed is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by
pushing the Distance Increase or Distance
Decrease buttons.
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a
convenience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road traffic,
weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to
the vehicle ahead, position in the lane compared
to other vehicles, and brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Some states and local laws may require hands
to be kept on the steering wheel at all times. For
vehicles equipped with the Hands-Free ADA
system, ONLY remove your hands from the
steering wheel if the Hands-Free system is
engaged, it is safe to do so, and it is permitted by
state and local laws.
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist
systems:
When driving in complex driving situations
(e.g. urban environments, construction zones,
etc.), adverse weather (e.g. rain, snow, fog,
sleet, dust), or adverse road conditions
(e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane mark-
ings, etc.).
When entering a highway off-ramp.
When driving on roads that are icy, snow
covered, or slippery.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving.
WARNING!
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
When all system conditions are met as described
in “System Engagement Conditions” in the next
section, the system will engage and the steering
wheel image in the display will change to green.
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering
wheel image, the “glow” effect of the instrument
cluster display will also change to green when
ADA is engaged.
If equipped with Hands-Free ADA, the light strips
in the driver’s and front passenger’s door
panels will also change to green indicating ADA
is engaged.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met before the
system will engage:
Active Driving Assist system is enabled
ACC is engaged
Driver seat belt is buckled
System detects visible lane markings
Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
Vehicle is centered in lane
Turn signal is not activated
Vehicle is not in a tight curve
Trailer is not connected
Driver has hands on steering wheel and is
paying attention to the road
Vehicle is driving on an approved roadway
If equipped with the Hands-Free system, a
subscription is active and the vehicle is
receiving a clear cellular signal
NOTE:
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the
steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the
outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering
wheel will not satisfy the hands-on condition to
engage the system.
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the
following situations:
If the system has detected driver inattentive-
ness, and has gone through all escalation warn-
ings after hands are no longer detected on the
steering wheel:
Base ADA: Hands no longer detected on the
steering wheel
Hands-Free ADA: Driver no longer attentive
If lane markings are no longer detected or poor
road conditions are experienced
If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
deactivated
If a turn signal is used when equipped with Base
ADA (unless a target is in the blind spot zone on
the same side the turn signal is being applied)
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
If the driver performs an evasive maneuver,
applying high torque to the steering wheel for a
short duration
If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph
(145 km/h)
If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is
pushed again (ADA will turn off)
If the driver steers out of the lane and crosses a
lane marking
If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/
braking
NOTE:
ADA will not enable if the system detects a
trailer is connected to the vehicle.
Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button
will turn the system off. All other deactivation
conditions will place the system back into the
“enabled” state with the steering wheel indi-
cator displayed in white until all engagement
conditions are met again.
When the system is deactivated, the system
status indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane
Management will return to its previous state,
and ACC will disable.
Hands-Free System Deactivation (If Equipped)
In addition to the deactivation conditions listed
above, the Hands-Free ADA system will also
deactivate in the following situations:
The system initiates a Stop-In-Lane maneuver to
stop the vehicle due to driver inattentiveness.
Refer to “Indications On The Display” in the next
section for further information.
The vehicle is not receiving a clear cellular
signal for an extended period of time.
The subscription for the Hands-Free system is
expired.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Active Driving Assist system status can always
be viewed in the instrument cluster display, and
status changes are shown by changes in color of
the system’s indicator lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as
previously described Ú page 155, the system
status indicator lights will change from green, to
yellow, to red. The following indicators will change
in color as warnings to the driver escalate:
Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel
icon in the instrument cluster display or Head
Up Display [if equipped])
Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
For Hands-Free ADA only, light strips in the
driver and front passenger’s door panels
For Base ADA, if driver attention is not returned,
the system will deactivate.
For Hands-Free ADA, if driver attention is not
returned, the system will perform a Stop-In-Lane
maneuver. Once the vehicle is at a standstill, the
vehicle will attempt to place an emergency call
through the Assist and SOS system. If a
Stop-In-Lane maneuver is completed, the system
will be unavailable until the ignition is cycled OFF,
then back to ON.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off
ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the
system is not actively steering the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
System is actively steering the vehicle and the
system detects driver is attentive.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
Driver inattentiveness has been detected,
warning the driver to place hands on the
steering wheel, or look back toward the road (if
equipped with the Hands-Free system).
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
Driver inattentiveness is still being detected,
warning the driver to place hands on the
steering wheel, or if equipped with the
Hands-Free system, take control of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For both Base ADA and Hands-Free ADA, the driver
MUST replace hands on the steering wheel and
take control of the vehicle when the system is
deactivated.
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
SYSTEM STATUS
Base Active Driving Assist System
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
(green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue
a steering wheel vibration to accompany these
warnings. The vibration warning (if enabled) will
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
example, when driving on a tight curve. This
feature can be turned on or off within the Uconnect
system Ú page 204.
SYSTEM OPERATION /LIMITATIONS
The Base Active Driving Assist and Hands-Free
Active Driving Assist systems DO NOT:
Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
slower vehicles, construction equipment,
pedestrians, or animals
Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
Change lanes (exception: Hands-Free, only
when initiated by the driver)
React to cross traffic
WARNING!
Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver
Assist feature, requiring driver attention at all
times. To prevent serious injury or death:
Always remain alert and be ready to take
control of the vehicle in the event that the
Active Driving Assist system disables.
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
when the Base Active Driving Assist system is
activated.
Always keep your eyes on the road when the
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is
activated.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions.
Do not use a hand held device when either
Base, or Hands-Free Active Driving Assist
system is engaged.
Always pay attention to the road when the
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is
engaged.
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could inter-
fere with the hand detection sensors.
WARNING!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component
of ADA. For ACC system limitations Ú page 145.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited
or reduced functionality when one of the following
conditions occur:
The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward
facing camera is damaged, covered,
misaligned, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice,
snow, etc.)
If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the
suspension, installing different sized wheels or
tires)
Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind-
shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the Park-
Sense switch. The driver can also override auto-
matic braking by changing the gear or by
pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity
during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle
is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Park Assist system or the Braking System
Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough
to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/
or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
tion state for the automatic braking function
through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
gear.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 168.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed
exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear
fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors
located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the
area in front and behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The front sensors detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal
direction.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with ParkSense Active
Park Assist, there will be six ParkSense sensors
located in the rear fascia/bumper.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
rear regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from
a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right
None
None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, and
the vehicle is stationary.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system Ú page 204.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 99. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located on the
switch back above the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to enable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
system state.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately two
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector
is moved to the DRIVE position, no warning
message will be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
the system requires service, the ParkSense switch
LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display a pop-up.
The pop-up will include up to two faults. Possible
fault messages are "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED.”
The pop-up message will display for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will display a
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE
OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate
is in the open position. An opened liftgate could
provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system detects the
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle using
the parking sensors located in the front and rear
fascia/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be
displayed if this feature is enabled within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 204.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
signal and, when enabled, with visual indications
on the instrument cluster display.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Front
ParkSense volume and chime type.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Rear
ParkSense volume and chime type.
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone. An
audible tone will only sound if a collision is
possible.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short
distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and
7 mph (0 and 11 km/h). The system can be
activated/deactivated via the Settings menu of the
Uconnect system. If the ParkSense System is
deactivated via the ParkSense hard switch, then
the Side Distance Warning system will
automatically be deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the
case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning
system sensors. Free the bumpers of any
obstacles, ensure that the front and rear fascia/
bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris
to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12 – 24 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous
Fast audible
chime as the
objects get
close to the
vehicle
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
“System Not Available” — This message is
displayed if the Side Distance Warning system is
not available. The failed operation of the system
might be due to the insufficient voltage from the
battery or other failures on the electrical system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the electrical system checked.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance
of the Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the message to
appear in the instrument cluster display will
read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the
parking sensors. Before using the ParkSense
system, it is recommended to remove the
removable tow hook ball assembly and any
attachments from the vehicle when it is not
used for towing operations.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a
proper parking space, providing audible/visual
instructions, and controlling the steering wheel.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector
and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle
into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on
either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
objects, and must intervene as required.
The system is designed to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the
driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain,
snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space
that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic
sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have at
least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to
improve the performance of the feature. The
system will also continuously perform the
dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differ-
ences such as over or under inflated tires and
new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel above the
Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn
off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking space
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the parking
space
Steering wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space
ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within the maximum amount of shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE
Ignition is in the RUN position
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated
Driver's door is closed
Rear liftgate is closed
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
Vehicle speed is less than 25 km/h
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle
is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h),
the system will cancel. The driver must then reac-
tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions
are not present.
If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE, and
an objected is detected, the system will default to
Parallel Park Exit. A prompt will appear in the radio
screen, and the driver will need to select “Yes” or
“No” for a Parallel Park Exit maneuver. Any other
conditions will result in a default to a Parallel
Parking maneuver.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, you can select between Parallel,
Perpendicular, and Parallel Park Exit maneuvers in
the Uconnect system.
Choose Parking Maneuver Below
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of the
vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
bicycles, etc.).
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
be overhanging or protruding into the parking
space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple
available parking spaces, the system will only
indicate the last detected parking space for the
maneuver).
While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full
screen image in the Uconnect display. If the
driver shifts to REVERSE while searching for a
parking space, a camera image will appear in
the Uconnect display with a “Shift To Drive”
message.
When an available parking space has been found,
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle
for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence
(depending on the type of maneuver being
performed).
Once active steering begins, a camera image will
display in the Uconnect display with prompts that
will display for the duration of the maneuver.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel. When
the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still
removed from the steering wheel), you will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
Shift To Reverse — Parallel Parking Space
Shift To Reverse — Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to
check the vehicle’s surroundings, and move
backward.
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE)
while keeping hands off of the steering wheel will
be instructed to the driver while checking the
vehicle’s surroundings before completing the
parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,
then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message
“Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position” will be displayed momentarily.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-automatic
parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within eight shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
The system will provide a warning to the driver
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down.
The driver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver
for any reason, the driver must take control of
the vehicle.
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel
parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active
ParkSense switch once. After selection, the system
activates and warns the driver on the instrument
cluster display about the operations that have to
be carried out to perform the maneuver correctly.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in
front of you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly be discon-
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result
in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in
order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the direction indicators to choose the direction
that you want to perform the maneuver. Use the
right arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to
the right side and use the left arrow indicator to
perform the maneuver to the left.
During the maneuver, the system instructs the
driver to shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn
signal in the direction you want to exit. Let go of the
steering wheel and use the brake or accelerator
pedals as instructed, while the system handles the
steering automatically for exiting the parking
space. If the driver continues to carry out a
voluntary or involuntary action on the steering
wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or
holding the steering wheel to prevent its
movement), the maneuver will be interrupted.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
display shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the system
gives back the vehicle control to the driver.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT OPERATION
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a
forward facing camera to detect lane markings or
road edges and to measure vehicle position within
the lane boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot
Monitoring sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent
lanes while the driver is preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the
vehicle approaches the lane marker (no turn signal
applied), the Active Lane Management system
provides a visual warning in the instrument cluster,
as well as a steering assist torque (if configured in
Uconnect Settings), to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues
to drift out of the lane, the system provides a
flashing visual warning through the instrument
cluster display as well as a haptic steering wheel
vibration (if configured in Uconnect Settings) when
the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
The warning will be in the form of a vibration in the
steering wheel, and/or automatic steering
assistance to direct the vehicle back toward the
center of the lane.
When both lane markings are detected, and the
driver uses the turn signal to indicate a lane
change while the system detects another vehicle in
the Blind Spot Monitoring zone on that side of the
vehicle, the Active Lane Management system
provides a warning in the form of steering assist
and/or steering vibration (depending on radio
settings) to guide the vehicle back to the center of
the lane.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Depending on the type of warning selected, the
system will either guide the vehicle back to the
center of the lane, provide a vibration in the
steering wheel, or both.
NOTE:
For an event where the Active Lane Management
system is reacting to a target vehicle in the
adjacent lane, the Blind Spot Monitoring indicator
LED on the mirror will flash, and the steering wheel
torque will be greater than for a normal lane
departure (no vehicle in adjacent lane).
The driver may manually override the steering
assist warning by applying force into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the Active Lane Management
system provides a visual warning in the instrument
cluster, as well as a steering assist torque (if
configured in Uconnect Settings), to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the
driver continues to drift out of the lane, the system
provides a flashing visual warning through the
instrument cluster display as well as a haptic
steering wheel vibration (if configured in Uconnect
Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane
boundary.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
Active Lane Management system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and
provides an audible and visual warning to the
driver if removed. The system will cancel if the
driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
O
N OR OFF
The Active Lane Management button is
located on the switch panel above the
Uconnect display.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane
Management button (LED turns off). A message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again
(LED turns on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain
the last system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT WARNING
M
ESSAGE
The Active Lane Management system will indicate
the current lane drift condition through the
instrument cluster display.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected.
System On (Gray Lines)
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the system is on and only the left lane
marking has been detected, and the system is
ready to provide visual warnings in the instru-
ment cluster display and a vibration and/or
steering assist warning in the steering wheel if a
lane departure occurs, the left lane line will be
green.
When the system senses the lane line has been
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line
will change to solid yellow and the system will
provide a haptic steering wheel vibration and/or
steering assist torque (if programmed in Ucon-
nect Settings).
When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line will change to flashing
yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates
with similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the system is on, the lane lines turn from
gray to green to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. When both lane
markings have been detected, the system is
ready to provide visual warnings in the instru-
ment cluster display and a vibration and/or
steering assist warning in the steering wheel if a
lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
When the system senses a lane drift situation,
the left lane line turns solid yellow. At this time,
steering assist warning is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line changes from solid
yellow to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time,
vibration is applied to the steering wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates
with similar behavior for a right lane departure.
If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle
begins to depart the lane at the same time the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects
another vehicle in the BSM zones, the system
will provide a haptic steering wheel vibration
and/or steering assist torque (if programmed in
Uconnect Settings).
CHANGING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
S
TATUS
Configurable settings for the Active Lane
Management system are available within the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
Selectable Warning Types:
Vibration Only
Steering Assist Only
Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings for this system are for
the intensity of the vibration (high/med/low),
steering assist warning (hi/med/low), and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/medium/late).
NOTE:
The system will not apply vibration and/or
steering assist to the steering wheel whenever a
safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Trac-
tion Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced
on when the ALM system is enabled.
The ALM system will be suppressed when the
Active Driving Assist system (if equipped) is
engaged.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Uconnect display screen along with a caution note
to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the
rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 204.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
following conditions occur: the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position, or the touchscreen button X to
disable the display of the Rear View Camera is
pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different
colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
When the rear window washer is activated by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
forward, the rear backup camera and digital
rearview mirror (if equipped) cameras are also
washed. For more information, see Ú page 66.
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle speed is
below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
upper left of the display screen, the image will
zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
the icon a second time will return the view to the
standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Back Up Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
VIEWING AT SPEED
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be
activated with the Back Up Camera
button in the Controls menu. This feature
allows the customer to monitor the area directly
behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to
10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle speed
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View
Camera image will be displayed continuously until
deactivated via the X button on the touchscreen.
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The TrailCam system allows you to you see an
on-screen image of the front view of your vehicle.
The image will be displayed on the Uconnect
display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
Front View Camera
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam system has programmable settings
that may be selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the following
methods:
Press the FWD Camera button on the controls
screen.
Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the
apps menu.
Press the TrailCam button on the Off-Road
Pages.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by
pressing the icon on the Back Up Camera view.
The Back Up Camera view can also be activated by
pressing the icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off and TrailCam view is
active, the TrailCam mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on and the TrailCam view is
active, the TrailCam image will be displayed for up
to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
the touchscreen button X to disable display of the
TrailCam view is pressed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the
TrailCam image will be displayed continuously
until deactivated via the touchscreen button X,
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button X to disable the display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of
the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera soft button
located on the TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam.
Washer fluid will stop when the button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a
time while holding the button.
NOTE:
Pressing the Clean Camera soft button will also
wash the Night Vision camera (if equipped).
If the front window washer feature is activated,
all of the front cameras on the vehicle will be
washed as well. The front camera washers will
not operate when the low washer fluid warning
is displayed.
Due to washer pump packaging, the front
camera washers will run out of fluid before the
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light is activated.
When the front camera washers stop func-
tioning, add fluid to the washer fluid reservoir to
resume function.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are
projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam view
based on the steering wheel position.
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The FamCam system consists of an interior
monitoring camera mounted on the headliner that
allows the driver to view cargo/passengers in the
rear interior of the vehicle through the Uconnect
screen.
To activate the feature, press the
FamCam button in the Controls tab of the
Vehicle menu. The FamCam feature can
also be accessed from the App Drawer, or
the status bar at the top of the Uconnect display.
The display will show the entire view inside the
vehicle on the left side of the screen, and will show
a zoomed in view of the selected seat on the right
side of the screen.
FamCam Display Example (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
To change the seat shown in the zoomed in view,
press a different seat location on the left side of
the display. The zoomed in view will then show the
new seat location. By default, the second row
driver’s side seat will be displayed in the zoomed in
view.
The display will appear in color in well-lit conditions
and will appear black and white in low light
conditions.
If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the X
on the screen, the view will close. Otherwise, the
FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE:
When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in
the zoomed in view on the right side of the display
will be retained. The next time the feature is acti-
vated, the same seat will be shown in the zoomed
in view.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Night Vision
Camera system which uses an infrared camera to
view the area ahead of the vehicle, beyond the
headlights, to detect people and large animals
when it is dark outside.
The system detects pedestrians or large animals
by measuring the temperature difference between
the object and the surrounding area.
The thermal objects detected by the camera can
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Scroll to the Night Vision page in the instrument
cluster display menu Ú page 104 to display the
Night Vision screen.
Warm objects (e.g. animals) will appear lighter on
the display while cold objects (e.g. traffic signs) will
appear darker.
NOTE:
Night Vision only shows objects of interest that
are warmer or colder than the surroundings.
Adjust the instrument cluster dimmer control
brightness to make the image appear brighter
or dimmer.
To exit out of the Night Vision screen, select a
different menu in the instrument cluster display.
A yellow or red border and box highlight will appear
around objects of interest. More than one object of
interest may be highlighted.
Highlight Around Objects Of Interest
The highlighting of the object(s) of interest will
update in real time based upon the current Night
Vision assessment.
The two categories of Night Vision warnings are
Pedestrian Warnings and Animal Warnings.
Pedestrian Warning Telltale
Animal Warning Telltale
A Pedestrian or Animal Warning is
considered either Level 1 or Level 2.
Level 1 warnings are yellow, and Level 2 warnings
are red. The colors are not configurable.
Level 1 Warnings:
Yellow telltale in the instrument cluster display
Yellow highlights around the detected pedes-
trian/animal
Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and the target is
in or approaching the vehicle path
Level 2 Warnings:
Red telltale in the instrument cluster display
Red highlights around the detected pedestrian/
animal
Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and a collision
with the detected pedestrian/animal is possible
The pedestrian/animal is directly in the vehicle
path, close to the headlight area
A video pop-up will display when there is a target
detected and the instrument cluster display is
not showing the Night Vision page
A chime will sound for a Level 2 Warning detec-
tion event
Only one telltale can be displayed at a time based
upon priority.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
(Continued)
The priority order of the warnings from highest to
lowest is:
1. Pedestrian Warning Level 2
2. Animal Warning Level 2
3. Pedestrian Warning Level 1
4. Animal Warning Level 1
Level 2 Warnings may display in the Head Up
Display (if equipped).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is stopped, or slowing down, all Level
2 warnings become Level 1 warnings.
You can enable or disable the warnings within the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
If the warnings are off, the telltales, chimes, and
warning messages will all be off. Pedestrians and
animals can still be detected by the system, but
there will be no warnings.
The Night Vision alert status telltale will
be gray when the warnings are
suppressed. The telltale will also turn
gray to indicate that the alerts are
suppressed due to environmental factors (e.g.
daylight hours, external temperature is greater
than 86°F (30°C)) or if the gear selector is in
REVERSE. When the Night Vision alerts are active,
the telltale will be green Ú page 110.
Camera Washers
When the front window washer is activated, the
Night Vision camera will also be washed
Ú page 65.
Due to washer pump packaging, the front
camera washers will run out of fluid before the
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light is activated.
When the front camera washers stop func-
tioning, add fluid to the washer fluid reservoir to
resume function.
DETECTION RANGE
The system can detect people 4 ft (1.25 m) tall or
greater in the upright position. The system can also
detect animals that are four-legged and 3 ft (1 m)
tall or greater in the upright position.
The detection distance for the system is between
26 ft (8 m) and 328 ft (100 m) from the front of the
vehicle.
The system may not be able to detect pedestrians
or animals in the following situations:
Pedestrian/animal is outside of the detection
range
Pedestrian/animal is fully or partially covered
Pedestrian/animal does not reach the minimum
detection height
WARNING!
Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to
a warning.
Never attempt to swerve around animals if
doing so would endanger you or other drivers
on the road.
Do not stare at the image while driving. You
could crash and you or others could be
injured.
The Night Vision system only provides alerts to
objects of interest and cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
The warnings are meant to direct your atten-
tion to the detected objects, but the Night
Vision system does not automatically brake
the vehicle and may not provide a warning
with enough time to help avoid a crash.
Warnings are only provided if a pedestrian or
large animal is detected by the system.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead, and most importantly, brake opera-
tion, to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
WARNING!
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Other objects on the road that meet the height/
shape/temperature (e.g. sun exposure) of pedes-
trians/animals may be detected and classified as
targets.
SERVICE THE NIGHT VISION SYSTEM
When service conditions are present, the following
fault messages may appear in the instrument
cluster display when the vehicle is placed in the ON
position.
If "Night Vision Unavailable Sensor Blocked"
appears in the instrument cluster display, make
sure the camera is clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other debris. The camera is located in the upper
fascia/bumper, inside the driver side grille slot.
Clean the camera using a soft wet cloth or by
pressing the Clean Camera soft button in the
Uconnect system. If the message continues to
appear after cycling the ignition, see an authorized
dealer.
If “Night Vision Temporarily Unavailable” or “Night
Vision Unavailable Service Required" appears in
the instrument cluster display after cycling the
ignition, see an authorized dealer.
The camera must be properly aligned to work
correctly. If the camera needs adjustment, see an
authorized dealer. Do not attempt to adjust the
camera yourself.
NOTE:
Alignment and performance of the Night Vision
may be affected by aftermarket modifications.
Mopar® parts should be used to get the optimal
performance of this system.
NIGHT VISION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The Night Vision display is deactivated under the
following conditions:
Vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
The ignition is not in the ON/RUN position
The headlights are off and the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h)
The Night Vision display warnings are suppressed
under the following conditions:
Daylight hours
Temperatures above 86°F (30°C)
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
On steep hills
On tight curves of the road
If the camera/sensor is damaged or blocked by
dirt, snow, ice, or other debris
In poor visibility conditions such as heavy fog,
rain, snow, or other weather conditions
If the vehicle has been modified with after-
market parts and/or accessories
NOTE:
If any of these conditions are present, the system
does not need service.
WARNING!
Night Vision can only detect pedestrians and
animals located within the range of the
infrared camera.
Night Vision may not detect pedestrians or
animals and highlight them if:
They are not in an upright position, for
example if they are sitting or lying down, or
if the pedestrian is riding a bicycle
The figure in the display appears incom-
plete, for example because the pedes-
trian or animal is partially behind a vehicle
The pedestrian/animal is not directly
ahead in the coverage area
The pedestrian/animal is part of a group
The pedestrian is wearing certain types of
clothing
The pedestrian/animal is moving too
quickly through the field of view
The sensor is blocked by dirt, rain, snow,
or ice
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround
View Camera system that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the surroundings and Top View
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE or a different view is selected
through the touchscreen soft buttons. The Top
View of the vehicle will show which doors are open.
The image will be displayed on the Uconnect
display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The
Surround View Camera system is comprised of four
sequential cameras located in the front grille, rear
liftgate and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has program-
mable settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View or Top View is the default view of the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a
touchscreen button X to disable the display of the
camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View
Camera mode is exited and the last known screen
appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
including the side view mirrors and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera
soft key located in the Controls menu within the
Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display.
There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image
at the front, rear, and if equipped, the sides of the
vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow to
red corresponding to the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Front tires will be in image when the tires are
turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
image may appear distorted.
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors and/or liftgate will cancel
outside image in Top View, but the standard
view remains unchanged.
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional
active guidelines for the projected path
when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
rear camera system. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Front View Plus Top View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the
vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view of
the front camera system. The Top View
will be disabled when this is selected.
Back Up Camera View
Pressing the Back Up Camera soft key
will provide a full screen rear view with
Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through
the Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the
Rear View screen will return to the Surround View
Camera menu. If the Back Up Camera was
manually activated through the Controls menu of
the Uconnect system, exiting out of the display
screen will return to the Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE
and the X button is pressed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
Front And Rear Camera Washers
When the front windshield washer is activated by
pulling the windshield wiper/washer lever
rearward, the front camera is also washed.
When the rear window washer is activated by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
forward, the rear backup camera and digital
rearview mirror (if equipped) cameras are also
washed. For more information, see Ú page 66.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
see an authorized dealer.
Due to washer pump packaging, the front
camera washers will run out of fluid before the
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light is activated.
When the front camera washers stop func-
tioning, add fluid to the washer fluid reservoir to
resume function.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in any gear selector position,
Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon
in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to two times the
standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will
return the view to the standard Back Up
Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Back Up Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing near the
rear outer edge of the fuel door near the
center to unlatch. Then use your hand to
rotate fuel door to full open.
Fuel Filler Door
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
Surround View.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push around the perimeter of the fuel
door to break the ice build-up.
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors
while refueling.
Fuel Filler
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door. Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on
the rear outer edge near the center.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 186.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 186.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) and a weight-distributing (load equalizing)
hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on
vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply
with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride
height.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for
proper leveling of the air suspension system.
2. Position the vehicle to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, use the touchscreen radio
settings to enable Tire/Jack mode. Tire/Jack
mode will be canceled and the procedure must
be restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 5mph (8 km/h).
4. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this is
height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground;
this is height H2.
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above Normal Ride Height [H1]).
8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch
off Tire/Jack mode. Make sure the truck
returns to Normal Ride Height. Perform a
visual inspection of the trailer and
weight-distributing hitch to confirm the
manufacturers’ recommendations have been
met.
9. The vehicle can now be driven.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
Measurement
Example
Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS )
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
2.0L (2nd Row) AWD
12,125 lb
(5,568 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,000 lb
(2,722 kg)
600 lb (272 kg)
3.6L (2nd Row)
AWD Light Duty
Cooling
8,600 lb
(3,901 kg)
30 sq ft
(2.79 sq m)
3,500 lb
(1,588 kg)
350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L (2nd Row) AWD
11,300 lb
(5,126 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,200 lb
(2,812 kg)
620 lb (281 kg)
3.6L (2nd Row)
RWD Light Duty
Cooling
8,500 lb
(3,856 kg)
30 sq ft
(2.79 sq m)
3,500 lb
(1,588 kg)
350 lb (159 kg)
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 378. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue weight and Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,800 lb (1,769 kg).
Vehicles not factory-equipped with the trailer tow package are limited to 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) GTW and 350 lb (158 kg) TW.
3.6L (2nd Row) RWD
11,200 lb
(5,080 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,200 lb
(2,812 kg)
620 lb (281 kg)
5.7L (2nd Row) AWD
12,700 lb
(5,761 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
7,200 lb
(3,266 kg)
720 lb (327 kg)
3.6L (3rd Row)
RWD Light Duty
Cooling
9,000 lb
(4,082 kg)
30 sq ft
(2.79 sq m)
3,500 lb
(1,588 kg)
350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L (3rd Row) RWD
11,700 lb
(5,307 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,200 lb
(2,812 kg)
620 lb (281 kg)
3.6L (3rd Row)
AWD Light Duty
Cooling
9,000 lb
(4,082 kg)
30 sq ft
(2.79 sq m)
3,500 lb
(1,588 kg)
350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L (3rd Row) AWD
11,700 lb
(5,307 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,200 lb
(2,812 kg)
620 lb (281 kg)
5.7L (3rd Row) AWD
13,100 lb
(5,942 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
7,200 lb
(3,266 kg)
720 lb (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the
trailer hitch receiver. This cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia/bumper.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter
turn counterclockwise and pull bottom of the
hitch receiver cover outward (towards you).
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards
you) then downwards to disengage the tabs
located at the top of the hitch receiver cover to
remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the
procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the fascia/bumper prior to installation.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
side which will cause loss of control of the
vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
(Continued)
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled
Servicing Ú page 334. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK (P). For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL (N). Always, block or "chock" the
trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 378.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 138. If the
vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N
(NEUTRAL)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA-TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED
T
RANSFER CASE WITHOUT 4WD LOW
R
ANGE) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models
do not have a N (NEUTRAL) position in the transfer
case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA–TRAC II WITH 4WD LOW
R
ANGE
The transfer case must be shifted into N
(NEUTRAL) and the transmission must be in PARK
(P) for recreational towing. The N (NEUTRAL)
selection button is adjacent to the air suspension
switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case N
(NEUTRAL) can take place with the selector switch
in any mode position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
to the transfer case.
The transmission must be in PARK for recre-
ational towing.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to be
met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met
before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or
are no longer met during the shift, then the
N (NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash contin-
uously until all requirements are met or until
the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift
air suspension, the engine should be
started and left running for a minimum of
60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
switch) for more than four seconds. The light
behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to N (NEUTRAL) is
complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN
NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
instrument cluster.
Before recreational towing, perform the proce-
dure outlined under “Shifting into N
(NEUTRAL)” to be certain that the transfer
case is fully in N (NEUTRAL). Otherwise,
internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
N (NEUTRAL) Button
6. After the shift is completed and the N
(NEUTRAL) light stays on, release the N
(NEUTRAL) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in N
(NEUTRAL), push and hold the ENGINE START/
STOP button until the engine turns off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK.
Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn the
ignition to the off position.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal use:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to be
met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met
before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or
are no longer met during the shift, the N
(NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until
the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
N (NEUTRAL) Button
7. When the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light turns off,
release the N (NEUTRAL) button. After the N
(NEUTRAL) button has been released, the
transfer case will always shift to 4WD HI.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
engine off.
9. Release the brake pedal.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
release the brake pedal, and check that the
vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than conventional
passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for cornering at
the same speeds as conventional passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the
lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the
current obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle
height should then be raised as required by the
changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change
the vehicle to the optimized height based on the
Selec-Terrain switch position. The vehicle height
can be changed from the default height for each
Selec-Terrain mode by normal use of the air
suspension switches Ú page 134.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range —
If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or
sand where additional low speed pulling power is
needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that
must be considered before entering the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or
21 inches (53 cm) without air suspension, of water
while crossing small rivers or streams. To maintain
optimal performance of your vehicle's heating and
ventilation system it is recommended to switch the
system into recirculation mode during water
fording. Be sure to avoid lowering the vehicle in
water, ensure that the easy exit entry setting is
turned off in Uconnect settings.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD LOW range on dry
pavement; driveline damage may result. 4WD
LOW range locks front and rear drivelines
together and does not allow for differential
action between the front to rear driveshafts.
Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause
driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
If you must drive through water, try to determine
the depth and the bottom condition (and location
of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to
minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level
recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you
must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of
9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can erode the
streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or
21 inches (53 cm) without air suspension, and
reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil,
transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure the
fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated
fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) should be
flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent
component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 134. Only
shift into a lower gear to maintain forward motion.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding and
loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission
to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD
LOW. Use FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep
hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to
a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart
the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly
down the hill, allowing the compression braking of
the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply
them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may
result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always
back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the brake.
4
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill.
Always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly.
This may provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and
will usually provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill
Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid
repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or
Selec-Speed Control use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle
go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning
against engine compression drag. This will permit
you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by
downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
203
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect
5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display system, refer to
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience,
features, stability, etc., and minimize the poten-
tial risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset
the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG
[US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting
options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
Entertainment Screens
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels
This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or
off.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
Setting Name Description
When the Entertainment Screens button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s Entertainment.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Passenger Screen Permissions
This setting will enable or disable Passenger Screen permissions. Options
within this setting are Navigation, Device Manager, and Uconnect Theater all
with On or Off options
Rear Seat Screen Permissions
This setting will enable or disable your Rear Seat Screen permissions. Option
within this setting is Navigation with On or Off options.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting
options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG
[US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male”
or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-in
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in, which is a feature that will allow you to
interrupt the help message or system prompts by speaking, to be turned on or
off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
Ambient Color Personalization
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the
ambient lighting color in the cabin.
Setting Name Description
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the
doors are opened.
Audio Settings
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Ú page 224.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
“Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure
when a collision is detected.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
Pedestrian Emergency Braking
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. This
setting is located in Automatic Emergency Braking.
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration
This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration on or
off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign.
The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
New Speed Zone Indication
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit
has changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual
+ Chime”.
Active Lane Management
This setting will alert the driver when a lane departure is detected. The
available options are “Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration +
Steering Assist”.
Active Lane Management Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Night Vision Video Warning
This setting will turn the Night Vision Video Warning and green/gray cluster
indicator light on or off.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Setting Name Description
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Side Distance Warning This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off.
Drowsy Driver Detection
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any
changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and
an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default
This setting will change the Electric Power Steering Default. The available
options are “Comfort” for a lower effort steering experience, “Normal” for the
standard effort steering experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort steering
experience.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Setting Name Description
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Set Time
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
hours or minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you
can scroll through the available days, months, and years.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off
This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off.
Available options are “On” and “Off”.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement
is completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation
Camera
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting
out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name
Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the
vehicle is turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Ambient Color Personalization
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the
ambient lighting color in the cabin.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. “Greeting Lights” must be selected
and “Headlight Illumination on Approach” must be selected above 0 seconds
for the feature to be enabled. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Proximity Wake-Up
This setting will allow you to turn on or off some exterior and interior lighting
illumination when approaching the vehicle.
NOTE:
Headlight Illumination On Approach must be set to a value other than zero for
Proximity Wake-Up to be active.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
Brakes
Greeting Lights
When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it enables “Headlight
Illumination On Approach”. When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is
selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. “Greeting Lights”
must be selected and “Headlight Illumination On Approach” must be selected
above zero seconds for the feature to be enabled. The available settings are
“On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or
the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn
on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display a setting related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is
selected, a pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No” options.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™) on or off.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
Seats & Comfort
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or
lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the
power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Relock
This setting will lock the doors after 30 seconds of the doors remaining
unlocked. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has
been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine
is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting (if equipped) will only activate the comfort systems when using
Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems
whenever the vehicle is started.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower
This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the key
fob.
Flash Lights With Lower
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the key
fob.
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30
sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after
vehicle shut off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and
“10 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off
Delay time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Windows With Key Fob
This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
Suspension
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings
Only” setting will only display warning messages.
Tire Jack Mode
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist it changing a
spare tire.
Auxiliary Mode
This setting will allow you to set the auxiliary suspension mode. The available
options are “Off”, “Transport Mode”, and “Wheel Alignment Mode”. In
Transport Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when being transported by
another vehicle. In Wheel Alignment Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when
a wheel alignment is being performed.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started.
The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the
system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off
Delay time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option
(Media, Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any
connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected
phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
Accessibility — If Equipped
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings
This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the
SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
Software Updates
System Information
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear,
displaying information about the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear,
displaying the licensing information of your radio.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available
options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone
projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can
also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values from your vehicle.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The Remote Sound System controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch increases the volume,
and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch
decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button makes the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/
SXM or Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the
next listenable station, and pushing the bottom of
the switch will seek down for the next listenable
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track, or
to the beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Passenger
Screen located above the glove compartment on
the passenger side of the vehicle. From the
Passenger Screen, you will be able to access
similar features seen within the Uconnect radio,
such as media functions, Rear Seat Entertainment
with Amazon FireTV Built-in, Navigation, and device
management.
To begin using the Passenger Screen, push the
Power button in the center stack, or press the
Power button under the Controls tab within the
Uconnect system. The Passenger Screen can be
turned off by accessing the Control screen and
pressing the Power Off button.
You must link Bluetooth® headphones to the
Passenger Screen to begin listening to the
system’s audio Ú page 233.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will need to be turned On
each time the vehicle is started, and the system
will display the Home Screen upon boot up.
PASSENGER SCREEN PERMISSIONS
Through the Uconnect system, features within the
Passenger Screen can be activated and
deactivated through Passenger Screen
Permissions. To access Permissions, press the
Vehicle button in the Menu Bar and select the
Settings tab. Then, press the Passenger Screen
settings menu. Press the On button for the
Passenger Screen Permission setting to activate
permissions.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Passenger Screen Permissions Settings Menu
By default, the Passenger Screen Permissions
setting is set to Off, and the driver will need to give
permission for the different features.
When Permissions is turned On, you can
individually select the permissions for the
followings:
Navigation
Device Manager
Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped
Passenger Screen Permissions can also be
activated through the Controls screen, under the
Vehicle button in the Menu Bar. If “Deny Passenger
Screen Permissions” is turned On, the setting will
switch itself to Off.
HOME SCREEN
Passenger Screen Home Screen
When the Passenger Screen is started up and no
other media was running during the last ignition
cycle, the Home Screen will display. Here, you can
select from the features of the Passenger Screen.
On the left side of the screen, you can access
“Notifications and System Controls”.
The Notifications button (the bell) will take you to
the Notifications screen, identical to what is seen
in the main radio.
You can cycle between the features by swiping left
or right on the touchscreen. When accessing a
feature, press the Home button on the left side to
access the feature view and select a different
feature.
The available features are:
Audio
Video & Images
HDMI
Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped
Navigation
Devices
Cameras
1 — Home Screen Button
2 — Notifications Button
3 — Controls Button
4 — Feature Cards
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
Controls Screen
From the Controls Screen, you can adjust the
daytime/nighttime brightness of the screen,
change headphone volume, and power off the
Passenger Screen.
To change the brightness, adjust the slider up or
down, or press the Up or Down Arrow button
located next to the slider. “Up” will increase
brightness; “Down” will decrease brightness.
Daytime and nighttime brightness levels will vary,
and the adjustment maximum/minimum will differ
depending on the time of day.
To change the headphone volume, adjust the
slider up or down, or press the Up or Down Arrow
button located next to the slider. “Up” will increase
the volume; “Down” will decrease the volume.
NOTE:
Headphone volume can also be manually adjusted
from the headphones. Changing the headphone
volume manually will not reflect in the headphone
volume slider on the Passenger Screen.
If the Screen Off button is pressed, the Passenger
Screen will continue to operate, but the screen will
go dark. Tap the screen again to return to the
display. While the screen is off, audio will continue
to play from the Passenger Screen.
The Power Off button will fully shut down the
Passenger Screen. No audio or video will play from
it.
Passenger Screen Controls Screen
AUDIO AND VIDEO
Audio Feature
Audio allows you to listen to your favorite radio
station, a connected USB device, or connected
media device. You can directly change the source
on the Home Screen by pressing the Source button
in the feature. You can also expand it by pressing
the Full Screen View button.
1 — Screen Off
2 — Power Off
3 — Manage Headphones
4 — Mute Headphones
5 — Display Brightness
6 — Headphone Volume
1 — All Sources Tab
2 — Now Playing Tab
3 — Browse Tab
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
To change the media source, press the Source
button and then press on the desired source. The
available sources are:
Live Radio (FM, AM, SXM)
Bluetooth®
USB 1
USB 2
AUX
AV 1 — If Equipped
AV 2 — If Equipped
Rear Screen 1 Listen In — If Equipped
Rear Screen 2 Listen In — If Equipped
NOTE:
Audio devices connected via Bluetooth® must
be done through the Device Manager in the
radio. For more information on pairing a device,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment.
If the driver is listening to “Live Radio”, the
option will not be available in the Passenger
Screen. Select “Now Playing On Radio” to listen
to the currently playing station. If the driver
selects a radio station while the Passenger
Screen is playing live radio content, the feed will
end on the Passenger Screen and control will be
given to the Uconnect system.
On the Preset menu, you will be able to listen to
saved radio presets. Press the desired preset to
begin listening.
The Browse tab will let you browse through
different radio stations or audio saved onto a USB
or audio device. Press “Browse” and select from
the different folders. You can scroll up and down to
view the options within those folders. Press on the
desired radio station or audio track to begin
playing it.
When the USB source is selected, you can chose a
video file to play if saved to a USB device. Press
“Browse” and locate the folder with the video file.
Press the video file name, and it will begin to play
on the Passenger Screen.
NOTE:
Not all video files will be supported from a USB.
Certain video files may require digital rights to view
or play. These may be unavailable for playback on
the Passenger Screen.
Playing A Video
1 — Source Bar
2 — Now Playing Tab
3 — Browse Button
4 — Preset Bar
5 — Related Button
6 — Seek Down Button
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Up Button
9 — Replay Button
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
W
ITH AMAZON FIRETV BUILT-IN —
I
F EQUIPPED
Rear Seat Entertainment will let you control and
listen in to the content being played on the rear
entertainment screens. You can view the contents
of the rear screens, lock the rear screens, change
the source of the rear screens, or turn the rear
screens on or off Ú page 235.
HDMI P ROJECTING
HDMI lets you connect a device to the provided
HDMI port, using an HDMI cable, and project the
device directly to the Passenger Screen. To begin,
plug a device into the HDMI port. Then, press the
HDMI button on the touchscreen.
HDMI will continue to show the menu bar and
Headphone Paring button.
NOTE:
The HDMI Card will not automatically launch
when a new device is connected. The HDMI
Card will show a device connected, and the Card
will need to be pressed.
If the user disconnects a device from the HDMI
port while the HDMI Card is in full screen, the
system will close HDMI and reload the Home
Screen.
DEVICE MANAGER
Device Manager
Device Manager provides an easy place to view all
the devices connected to the Uconnect system and
lets you pair the Driver’s smartphone to the
Uconnect system. You will also pair Bluetooth®
headphones to the Passenger Screen from this
screen.
For more information on pairing your smartphone,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
To pair a set of Bluetooth® Headphones:
1. If viewing Device Manager in full screen,
press the Add Device button. If viewing Device
Manager on the Home Screen, press “Pair
Bluetooth® headphones”.
2. From the pop-up, press “Search For
Headphones”. The system will begin searching
for the Bluetooth® signal of your headphones.
3. Select the name of you headphones from the
list of possible devices. The system will
connect to the headphones.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will connect to previously
paired Bluetooth® headphones after Passenger
Screen activation.
1 — Device Settings Button
2 — Phone Connectivity Button
3 — Media Connectivity Button
4 — Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® Button
5 — Add Device Button
6 — Manage Headphone Button
7 — Do Not Disturb Button
8 — Two Active Phones Button
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
Removing Bluetooth® Headphones
1. From the Controls screen, press the Manage
Headphones button.
2. Press the Settings button (gear icon) next to
the set of headphones you wish to remove.
3. Press “Delete Device”; the Bluetooth®
headphones will be removed from the system.
NAVIGATION
Navigation allows you to assist the driver in
searching for destinations using Uconnect’s
built-in Navigation system. For information on the
full functionality of Navigation, refer to your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
When a new route is selected from the Passenger
Screen, a confirmation will be sent to the driver.
The driver will be able to confirm or deny the route.
NOTE:
Using Navigation on the Passenger Screen will not
affect the Navigation screen in the Uconnect
system. The Driver can continue to use Navigation
while the Passenger Screen can “suggest” new
routes or stops.
CAMERA
Camera will display the equipped vehicle camera
feed. When selected, press the desired Camera
button. The feed from that camera will display in
the center of the touchscreen. Press the X button
or Back Arrow button to return to the Home Screen.
NOTE:
The Passenger Screen will lose access to a camera
if the driver chooses to view it on the Uconnect
system or if a condition would activate the camera
on the Uconnect system (the rearview camera
being activated when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE).
3RD PARTY APPS
If equipped, your vehicle may contain some 3rd
party apps, which will further enhance your
Uconnect system.
McIntosh
McIntosh is a 3rd party app that can enhance your
Uconnect system’s media player. For the app to be
effective, there must be audio playback in the
Uconnect media player. McIntosh can control the
playback of audio as well as display the output
level decibel meters.
To launch the app, begin playing audio and follow
these steps:
1. Press the Apps button.
2. Press the McIntosh app.
McIntosh
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
The McIntosh app will allow you to perform the following when listening to music:
NOTE:
The seek feature will not work while using Blue-
tooth®.
You cannot change the audio source within the
app. To do so, press the Media button, and then
press the Sources button.
To exit the app, press any of the buttons on the
Bottom Menu Bar.
For more information on the McIntosh app and its
functionality, please visit
https://
www.mcintoshlabs.com
.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
AMAZON FIRETV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED
OVERVIEW
Rear Seat Entertainment is designed to give your
family years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your Rear
Seat Entertainment system:
Stream your favorite shows with Amazon FireTV
Plug and play a variety of standard video games
or devices into the HDMI port
Listen to audio over wireless headphones (not
included, customer will have to provide their
own)
Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video
USB port
Please review this Owner's Manual to become
familiar with its features and operation.
Skip Backward Press to skip backward. Press and hold to fast rewind.
Play/Pause Press to play/pause the track.
Skip Forward Press to skip forward. Press and hold to fast forward.
Repeat
Press to repeat track. Press again to repeat playlist. Press again to turn off
(works only with a USB device).
Change Channel Down
Press to change channel down. Press and hold to seek channel down. While
using AM/FM, pressing the channel down will change the frequency by 0.2.
Pressing and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
Change Channel Up
Press to change channel up. Press and hold to seek channel up. While using
AM/FM, pressing the channel up will change the frequency by 0.2. Pressing
and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
GETTING STARTED
Rear Screen Entertainment for Uconnect 5/5 NAV
There are four different ways to operate the
features of Rear Seat Entertainment:
Rear Seat Entertainment remote control
Front radio screen
Passenger screen
Individual Rear Seat Entertainment touch-
screens
For information on the front media hub USB/AUX
ports Ú page 77.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
E
NTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON FIRETV
B
UILT-IN FROM THE RADIO
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment
system by following the steps below:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Rear Seat Entertainment with
Amazon FireTV Built-in button on the
touchscreen. You may need to navigate to
different pages in the Apps drawer to find the
Rear Seat Entertainment with Amazon FireTV
Built-in button.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
E
NTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON FIRETV
B
UILT-IN FROM THE REAR SCREENS
You can also access your Rear Seat Entertainment
system by choosing one of the following options:
Option 1
Pushing the power button on the Rear Seat
Entertainment remote.
Option 2
Swiping on either of the Rear Seat Entertain-
ment touchscreens.
NOTE:
While accessing on the rear screens, the system
will launch with the integrated Amazon FireTV.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
E
NTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON FIRETV
B
UILT-IN FROM THE PASSENGER
S
CREEN — IF EQUIPPED
You can also access Rear Seat Entertainment
content from the Passenger Screen.
Follow the steps below:
1. Access the Home screen for the Passenger
Screen.
2. Cycle between the features on the Home
screen and select Rear Seat Entertainment.
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen)
2 — Headphone Jack
3 — USB C Charging Port
4 — HDMI Port
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
FIRST TIME STARTING UP (USING THE
R
EAR SCREENS )
Boot Up Screen
When turning on the system for the first time from
the rear screens, a boot up screen will appear on
the system displaying the Amazon FireTV logo.
During this boot up sequence, language options
will be available for the system.
Remote Pairing
After the boot up sequence is complete, the
system will then give the option to pair the Rear
Seat Entertainment remote (included with the
system).
Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair
the remote with the system.
NOTE:
If remote pairing fails, on-screen instructions will
appear for trying to pair the remote again.
Connecting to a Network
During the start-up process, the system will need to
be connected to a network. Multiple network
sources can be options for the system and one will
need to be selected for the system to function.
Some options for a network connection are:
Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if
activated, it will show as a possible network for
the system on the screen).
Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network.
In-vehicle Wi-Fi.
NOTE:
When a network is connected to the system for the
first time, an over-the-air software update will take
place using the Wi-Fi connection. After this
first-time update, updates will only accrue when
one is available. It is recommended that you
connect your RSE/Amazon Fire OS to a Wi-Fi
Hotspot with unlimited data and a good signal
(such as a home Wi-Fi network) in order to check
for future Fire OS updates.
Account Sign-in
The next step will be the option to sign in to your
Amazon account.
There are two options to sign into the system:
I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with
an already existing Amazon account
I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon
Account
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the
on-screen steps to set up an Amazon account with
the system.
App Content
During the process, streaming services and TV
services can be selected to focus on what you plan
to watch the most. These streaming services and
TV services will show in the Apps and Channels
categories on the Rear Seat Entertainment Home
screen.
Parental Controls
Another feature that will appear during this first
time set up is parental controls.
When the parental controls page appears, it will
give the options to “Enable Parental Controls” and
“No Parental Controls”. If “Enable Parental
Controls” is selected, follow the on-screen steps to
set up parental controls for the system.
REAR SCREEN FLY-OUT MENU
Accessing the rear screen fly-out menu will give
more options for Rear Seat Entertainment.
To access the rear screen fly-out menu, swipe up or
down on the screen. The menu can also be
accessed by pushing the Gear/Settings button on
the Rear Seat Entertainment remote.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
Some options in the fly-out menu are listed below:
Power — This will power the screen off.
On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the
on-screen remote to use with the system.
Back — This will let you go back a page.
Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain
settings in the system. For more setting options,
select “Settings” within the on-screen Gear/
Settings menu.
Car — This will bring up the car menu. From here
you can adjust rear climate controls and the Are
We There Yet? app.
PARENTAL CONTROLS (USING THE REAR
S
CREENS )
If parental controls were not set during the first
time start up of the system, they can be set by
following these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the remote
or swipe up or down on the screen.
2. Select the “Gear/Settings” icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen
4. While in the Settings, select “Preferences”.
5. Select “Parental Controls”, from here you can
turn Parental Controls on or off and set up a
PIN for the controls using the remote.
PAIRING THE REMOTE (USING THE REAR
S
CREENS )
If a Rear Seat Entertainment remote needs to be
paired and was not paired during the start-up
sequence, follow this procedure:
1. Install batteries into the remote.
2. Push the Gear/Settings button on the remote
or swipe up or down on the screen.
3. Select the “Gear/Settings” icon on the screen.
4. Select “Settings” on the screen
5. In the Settings, select “Controllers &
Bluetooth® Devices”.
6. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”.
7. Follow the on-screen steps for remote pairing.
MEDIA SOURCES INPUT (USING THE
R
ADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Front Radio Screen
Users can select inputs for each rear screen from
the front radio touchscreen by selecting the Rear
Seat Tab and choosing the desired content by
selecting “Launch Source” on the Screen 1 or
Screen 2 tab.
Inputs available within Launch Source under
“Inputs” are “FireTV”, “HDMI”, and “USB”.
Rear Screens
To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on
the Rear Seat Entertainment Home screen and
select your desired input under “Input”.
Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in
the top menu. While in this tab, scroll down to
“Inputs” for selection.
NOTE:
The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend
on the naming of the vehicle’s brand.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT REMOTE
C
ONTROL
Remote Control
1.
Power Button
— Turns the screen for the
selected channel on or off.
2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has
options by pressing the Circle button Up,
Down, Left, or Right to navigate on-screen for
selections and pushing the center button to
confirm selections.
3. Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to
the previous screen.
4. Home — Push to return to the Amazon FireTV
Built-in Home screen.
5. Seek Backward/Rewind Button — Push
and hold to fast rewind through the current
audio track or video chapter. Push once to
revert back to the previous track.
6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the
volume and + button to increase the volume.
7. Channel Guide — Push to access the channel
guide for the system.
8. Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
9. Amazon Prime — Push to navigate to Amazon
Prime Home screen.
10. Partner 1 — Push to navigate to Partner 1
Home screen.
11. Alexa — Push to activate Alexa.
12. Menu — Push to access the FireTV menu.
13. Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to
fast forward through the current audio track or
video chapter. Push once to skip to the next
track.
14. Play/Pause Button ? — Begin/resume or
pause disc play.
15. Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow
button on the Channel button to browse
channels available in FireTV.
16. Recent — Push to access recently viewed
content on FireTV.
17. Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting
options for FireTV.
18. Partner 2 — Push to navigate to Partner 2
Home screen.
19. Car Button — Push to activate the Car menu
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for
operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back
of the remote, then slide the battery cover
downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery
recycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram shown
inside the battery compartment.
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
A
MAZON FIRETV BUILT-IN STREAMING
(U
SING THE RADIO AND REAR
S
CREENS )
Access Using Launch Source
To access streaming options with Rear Seat
Entertainment on the front screen, press the
Media tab located on the bottom menu bar. Then
select the Rear Seat option located on the top
menu bar. Then select “Launch Source”, and then
select under inputs “FireTV Home”.
Access Using Browse Media
Selecting Browse Media on the front radio screen
will give access to different media within Rear Seat
Entertainment.
These options will be in the top menu of Browse
Media and are listed below:
FireTV — Selecting FireTV will give options to
view streaming options for categories like “For
Kids” and to select other streaming app options
like “Prime Video”, etc. This option will be select-
able on the left slider menu in “Browse Media”.
While in “Browse Media” under FireTV, it will
display recent activity under “Recent”. This will
display recent videos viewed from FireTV to
recent downloads as well.
USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will
appear that are options with a USB device
connected to Rear Seat Entertainment.
USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will
appear that are options with a USB device
connected to Rear Seat Entertainment.
Access Using Rear Seat Entertainment Remote
and Rear Screens
Rear passengers will be able to access Rear Seat
Entertainment Streaming by pressing the “Amazon
Prime”, “Partner 1”, or “Partner 2” button on the
Rear Seat Entertainment remote. Selecting one of
those buttons on the remote will take you to the
home page for that respective streaming service.
Turning on either of the rear screens will launch
Rear Seat Entertainment. By default, the rear
screens will always launch in Amazon FireTV.
Amazon FireTV Built-In
The main source to access online streaming for
Rear Seat Entertainment is Amazon FireTV Built-in.
NOTE:
4G Wi-Fi Hot Spot needs to be activated on the
vehicle for streaming to be accessible. This can be
set up when Rear Seat Entertainment is turned on
for the first time from the rear screens. A mobile
device can also be used as the Wi-Fi Hot Spot for
the vehicle. A 4G source needs to be either an
in-vehicle Wi-Fi plan or through a 4G device.
To access Amazon FireTV Built-in on the front
screen, select “Launch Source” on the front radio
rear seat screen. Then “FireTV Home” under the
Inputs selection.
The top menu bar for Amazon FireTV will have the
options for “Home”, “Library”, “Brand”, “Live”, and
“Apps”.
Below the top menu bar will be streaming options
linked to your Amazon Prime account like “Prime
Video”.
Depending on the streaming option selected in
FireTV, they will have a similar home page.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
The front radio screen offers some options:
Power — This will turn Amazon FireTV Built-in on
or off.
Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles
between the Rear Screens (for use with front
radio screen only).
Collapse — While viewing on the front radio
screen, this will collapse the screen to dash-
board view.
Source Drawer — This will open the “Source
Drawer” and the source logo will be displayed
on the icon.
Browse Media — This will open the “Browse
Media” pop-up.
Back — This will let you go back the previous
page.
FireTV Home — This will take you back to the
Amazon FireTV home page.
Menu — This will open the Amazon FireTV menu.
Remote icon — This will display the on-screen
remote.
NOTE:
Front screen viewing and watching can only be
done when the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear screens will always launch with Amazon
FireTV.
REAR SCREEN ENTERTAINMENT WITH
A
MAZON FIRETV BUILT-IN APPS/
G
AMES (USING THE REAR SCREENS)
Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat
Entertainment.
NOTE:
No preloaded games are included with Rear Seat
Entertainment.
To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the
system and select “Apps” in the top menu. Within
the Apps menu you can purchase apps and games.
From here you can also select all the apps and
games that have been purchased.
ARE WE THERE YET?
When a navigation route has been set from the
Uconnect system, the second-row passengers can
use “Are We There Yet?” for an animated screen
showing distance and time remaining on
navigation routes, as well as the estimated time of
arrival with pop-up notifications.
Some screen information includes:
Decrease Timing Between Notifications Button
Notifications ON/OFF Button
Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
Arrival Time
Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
Distance Remaining
To access “Are We There Yet?” from the rear
screens, follow the steps below:
1. Swipe up or down on one of the rear screens
and select the Car icon or push the “Car”
button on the Rear Seat Entertainment
remote.
2. Select “Are We There Yet?” near the bottom of
the menu on the first page of options.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
A
MAZON FIRETV BUILT-IN 3RD PARTY
A
PPS — IF EQUIPPED
If available, Rear Seat Entertainment can work
with 3rd party apps downloaded from the Google
Play Store or the App Store.
VOXX EVOLVE
VOXX EVOLVE is a 3rd party app that can offer
more casting options for mobile devices with Rear
Seat Entertainment.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
USING THE VIDEO USB PORT
Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and
play your favorite music or movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a
USB drive into the port. The USB drive port is
located under the radio controls in the instrument
panel.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of
the USB device by going to the USB source in the
inputs. Use the search feature to find your media
faster.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to the either
HDMI ports located behind the first row seat.
Headphone Jack/HDMI/USB
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games may exceed the
power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter
Ú page 81.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
Rear Seat Entertainment does not come equipped
with headphones. Customers will need to provide
their own wireless headphones that can be paired
with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers can
also use their own wired headphones and plug
them into a Headphone Jack located under one of
the rear screens.
Wireless Headphones Pairing
To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat
Entertainment using the rear screens, follow these
steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the remote
or swipe up or down on the screen.
2. Select the “Gear/Settings” icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen
4. While in the Settings, select “Controllers &
Bluetooth® Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow
the on-screen steps for pairing.
Multiple headphones can be paired with the
system at once.
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
3 — HDMI Port
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
REAR CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using Rear Seat Entertainment Ú page 67.
Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the Car menu. Swipe up or down on either rear screen and select the Car icon or press the “Car” button on the
Rear Seat Entertainment remote. Then select the Rear Climate Controls option.
Options within Rear Climate Controls are listed below:
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
SYNC
SYNC Button
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the
system to switch between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the
temperature. The temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
Headliner
Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of
the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level
Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor
Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
1,2,3, etc.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
Icon Description
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
LEGAL NOTICE
To access Legal and Compliance information
about Rear Seat Entertainment from the rear
screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the remote
or swipe up or down on the screen.
2. Select the “Gear/Settings” icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen
4. While in the Settings menu, select “Device &
Software”.
5. From this menu, select “Legal Notices”. From
this menu you an also select “Terms of Use”
and “Privacy”.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road
Pages, which provides the vehicle status
information while operating on off-road conditions.
It supplies information relating to the vehicle ride
height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch
and roll of the vehicle, and the active Selec-Terrain
mode.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road
button on the touchscreen from the Vehicle menu,
and then press “Launch Off-Road”.
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Accessory Gauges
Pitch & Roll
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
Suspension — If Equipped
Forward Facing Camera — If Equipped
NOTE:
With a Connected Services subscription, you can
record your Off-Road data and send it directly to
the mobile app. Press the Record button to begin.
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of
the five selectable page options. It provides
continually updating information for the following
items:
Current Transfer Case Status
Current Selec-Terrain mode
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Hill Descent
Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control
Selected Speed in MPH (km/h).
Current Terrain Mode
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
5 — Current Terrain Mode
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axle Locker — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission
Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
1 — Vehicle Dynamics
2 — Steering Angle
3 — Rear Axle Status
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Battery Voltage
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will alter
the image on the screen. The vehicle must be in
the ON/RUN position to display Selec-Terrain
information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
Sand/Mud
Snow
Auto — Default
Sport
NOTE:
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar will also display the
current Selec-Terrain mode.
SUSPENSION — IF EQUIPPED
The Suspension page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
Wheel Articulation
Current Ride Height Status
Off-Road 2
Off-Road 1
Normal
Aero
Entry/Exit
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by a
yellow color in the Wheel Articulation. If Ride Height
is adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the screen
will switch to the appropriate height and the Wheel
Articulation will show the movement and change in
height.
Suspension Menu
1 — Wheel Articulation
2 — Current Ride Height
5
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 410.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
249
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION (DDD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued
and warns the driver to pull over and take a break.
To Activate/Deactivate
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the
Uconnect system by selecting the following in
order:
1. “Safety & Driving Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”
System Intervention
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s steering
patterns, any buttons/switches that are pressed,
and from the front camera, the system implements
two operating logics:
The first operating logic takes the driving style
into account, observing the road and detecting
to what extent the driver can continue driving
with few lane crossing events.
The second operating logic measures the time
spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed
above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below 110 mph
(180 km/h).
NOTE:
If the conditions described above are not detected
continuously during the entire driving period, the
“Drowsy Driver” message may be displayed later
than two or three hours. If the driving style indi-
cates that the driver is unable to follow the road
trajectory and respect the horizontal lane
markings, the red symbol will appear on the
instrument cluster display to suggest that the
driver should stop for a break. An audible signal
will also sound.
If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the
system by pushing the “OK” button on the left side
of the steering wheel, the message will disappear
from the display.
If the driver does not acknowledge the warning, it
will be displayed for 60 seconds and then
disappear.
NOTE:
In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedicated
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
DDD Warning Message
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does
not relieve the driver of the responsibility of
driving the vehicle. If you experience fatigue
while driving, pull over safely for a break without
waiting for the DDD to intervene. Only return to
the road when you are in the right physical and
mental condition to prevent endangering
yourself and other drivers.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA will consider the presence of an object in the
rear seat when a rear entry/exit door is opened at
the beginning of each key cycle. To activate, the
rear door must be open for more than one second
and the vehicle must be placed in the ON/RUN
position within 10 minutes. When the potential
presence of an object is determined and/or
otherwise inferred, a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display reminding driver to
check the rear seat(s) immediately after key off
accompanied by an alert upon exiting the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC
system. This system includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and
Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS),
Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). See Ú page 252 for a
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to
return to "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road
driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills
during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the
brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable
HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-
sponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback
to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
activated. This is the normal operating condition
for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable condi-
tions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R)
gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehi-
cles equipped with a manual transmission, if
the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, see Ú page 99 for further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 204 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS
is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake system for
a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
TSC will become active automatically once an
excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 187.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane in width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side of the
vehicle, near the B-pillar, and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors
the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver
of vehicles in these areas. BSM will alert earlier on
faster-approaching vehicles — up to 15 mph
(24 km/h) difference.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles (greater
then 15 mph) that are outside the detection
zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in random
false detections on the trailer, and false chimes
when the turn signal is used Ú page 204.
The BSM system may experience dropouts
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning
indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small
object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors. In addition,
when the turn signal is activated during the alert on
the side of the vehicle corresponding to the alert,
an audible (chime) alert can be heard. During this
audible (chime) alert, the radio volume will be
reduced Ú page 261.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (Side, Rear, Front)
while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The
BSM system will issue an alert during these types
of zone entries.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 410.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
When RCP is on (Blind Spot Lights Only or Blind
Spot Lights/Chimes) and the vehicle is in
REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the
visual and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available
in the Uconnect system Ú page 204.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if
on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or
RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver
with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
limited braking to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited
braking are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings and
may provide a brake jerk warning.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a back up
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect a vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even
when using RCP. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the
system may provide maximum braking to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle
at a standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 410.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles, such as guardrails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within an ignition cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings. If the
vehicle enters 4WD Low, the FCW system will be
automatically deactivated.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 204.
NOTE:
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
an audible/visual warning when the latter is at a
farther distance than the “Medium” setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
the distance between the vehicle in the front is
much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
ence.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the
audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) Limited Service
Required” or “Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully
available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If
the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, the instrument cluster
displays “AEB Unavailable Service Required.”
AEB Unavailable Service Required indicates there
is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) system which provides the driver
with audible warnings and visual warnings, in the
instrument cluster display. It may apply limited
automatic braking when it detects a potential
frontal collision with a pedestrian.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
(62 km/h), the system may provide maximum
braking to mitigate the potential collision with a
pedestrian/cyclist. If the PEB event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle
at a standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes. When the system determines a collision
with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no
longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision
with the pedestrian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display
in the Control settings Ú page 204.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible frontal collision with
the pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down. The system
will not reset to the default setting when the
vehicle is restarted.
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) —
If Equipped
ICA uses three front radar sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming vehicles
from the front or side when driving through an
intersection. When the system determines that a
collision is probable when turning across
oncoming traffic, the system will attempt to
mitigate a possible collision by decelerating the
vehicle. When the system determines that a
collision with a crossing vehicle is probable, the
system may apply additional braking to
supplement the driver braking input to attempt to
mitigate a possible collision. The system will also
provide audible warnings and visual warnings
(shown in the instrument cluster). If the driver
determines acceleration is needed to avoid a
collision, when the accelerator is pressed ICA will
cancel.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire
pressure Ú page 410.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven
— this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
For information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires, see Ú page 378.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
warning threshold for any reason, including low
temperature effects, or natural pressure loss
through the tire.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
PEB detect every type of potential collision with
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
(Continued)
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire
pressure must be increased to the recommended
cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 36 psi (248 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure
is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
equipped with Tire Fill Alert.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warnings have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System sensor.
CAUTION!
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly check
the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures
TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or
more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message and
a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the
low tire(s) in a different color Ú page 99.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units in
PSI, BAR, or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a
different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will return to its
original color and the TPMS Warning Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have
been received. The system will automatically
update the graphic display of the pressure value(s)
and will return to its original color. The TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressure(s) have been received in the case when
the ignition is ON. In the case when the ignition is
OFF, the ignition on the vehicle has to be turned ON
and may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information for the pressure value(s) to be
updated.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
Service TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected. The system
fault will also sound a chime. The instrument
cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds.
This message is then followed by a graphic display,
with “--“ in place of the pressure value(s),
indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer
flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
NOTE:
A TPMS sensor is not offered on any size spare tire.
In either option of having a full size spare equipped
or not, the tire pressure is not monitored or
displayed on the cluster for the corresponding
spare tire location. If you install the spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will remain on, a chime will sound,
and the instrument cluster display will still display
a pressure value in the different color graphic
display and an “Inflate to XX” message will be
displayed. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the instrument cluster display
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value. For each subsequent
ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster display will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value. Once you repair or replace the
original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster display will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated by replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such
as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure
values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition
cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the
tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Tire Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the
Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert system will only support
inflating or deflating one tire at a time. The user
is required to wait until the hazard lights STOP
flashing or 26-30 seconds after the desired
pressure is achieved in one wheel before
switching to another.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects an increase in tire pressure while filling the
tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with
the transmission in PARK for vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, the parking
brake must be applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps
do not come on while inflating the tire, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor may be in an
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle
may need to be moved slightly forward or
backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-
filled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is
then underinflated and will continue to chirp
every five seconds if the user continues to
deflate the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) —
If Equipped
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the
normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
designed to allow you to select a pressure to inflate
or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to,
and to provide feedback while inflating or deflating
the vehicle's tires.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system,
you will be able to select a pressure setting for both
the front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling
through a pressure range from ≥15 psi to XX in
1 psi increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for
the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle
placard pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for
each axle in the Uconnect system application as
preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset
pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect
system for the front and rear axle. Once you select
the tire pressures for the front and rear axles that
you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin
inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time. The user is required
to wait until the hazard lights STOP flashing or
26-30 seconds after the desired pressure is
achieved in one wheel before switching to another.
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire pressure.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the
transmission in PARK in vehicles with an automatic
transmission, and in NEUTRAL with the parking
brake engaged in vehicles with a manual
transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to
confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure screen will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating or deflating the tire, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor may be in an
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle
may need to be moved slightly forward or
backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the
following STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let you know when to
stop inflating or deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overinflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is added or removed to reach proper selected
pressure level.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 290.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 290.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 407 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you
have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not prop-
erly buckled up. You can strike the interior of
your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you
and others in your vehicle are buckled up prop-
erly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
(Continued)
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at
their seating position to minimize the risk of
severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system Ú page 300.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
5 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Six And Seven Passenger Only
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on
the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used
to hold the seat belt out of the path of the third row
seat back when it is being folded and opened. Only
place the seat belt webbing in this clip while folding
and opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing
behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an
occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be
positioned properly on the occupant and they
could be more seriously injured in an accident
as a result.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately Ú page 110.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
(Continued)
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System (“OCS”)
that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemen-
tal Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraints Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part
of a Federally regulated safety system for this
vehicle.
It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists
of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat. The
Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat
cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be
sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s
most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on
occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front
passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and
the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects. The
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an
adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in a
full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on,
or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components must
function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related
component or fastener be modified or replaced
with any part except those which are approved
by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight
input. This may result in serious injury or death
in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, which may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from
working properly, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
objects on the floor under the front passenger
seat.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in
the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags
provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
(Continued)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
(Continued)
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
If Applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts.
Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used with
the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Second Row LATCH Positions
(5 Passenger)
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions
(6 Passenger)
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions
(7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the
outboard seating positions?
Five Passenger — No
Five Passenger — Use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
The anchorages are under a flap with the
anchorage symbols on it. Pull the top of the flap
away from the seatback to access the lower
anchorages.
Five Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Five, Six, And Seven Passenger Vehicles:
Second Row Upper Tether Anchorage
Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Captain's Chair)
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
Five And Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(2nd Row Bench)
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: Third Row
Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel
away from the seat back, this will expose the top
tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Five Passenger Second Row Seating:
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. For
typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 299.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
Six Passenger Second Row Seating:
Seven Passenger Second Row Seating:
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 300 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH
anchorages to install a child seat in the center of
the back seat.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. For typical
installation instructions, see Ú page 299.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
on Ú page 275 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
5 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Five Passenger
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(5 And 7 Passenger Seating)
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 294 for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
Six And Seven Passenger
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
Strap Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Located On Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(5 And 7 Passenger Seating)
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting (6 Passenger)
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until
the gap panel is folded down. Do not use the
visible cargo tie down hooks, located on the
floor behind the seats, to attach a child
restraint tether anchor.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 120.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 269.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
309
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the switch bank just above the radio screen.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED
ASSIST And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 410.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function
if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which comes
as a built-in function. Other Jeep® Connect
services will only be operable if you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you
will be connected to a representative for assis-
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Jeep® Connect Customer Care – Total support
for Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the overhead console or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants
and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS operator
until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console lights located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE JEEP® CONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated, have
an authorized dealer service the SOS Call
system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
matic leveling to be disabled before changing a
tire. This feature can be activated through the
Uconnect system Ú page 140.
NOTE:
Before changing a tire or using the jack please
disable the hands free lift gate, This feature can be
disabled through the Uconnect system
Ú page 220.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the driver’s front tire,
block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACK LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, under the load floor.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, the jacking
tool locations vary from second and third row
seating.
1. Locate and lift up on the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
2. Access the jack and tool storage.
Jack Storage Location (Second Row Seating)
Jack Storage Location
(Third Row Seating Without Air Suspension)
Jack Storage Location
(Third Row Seating With Air Suspension)
3. Remove the jack storage cover. To remove,
firmly press the two side tabs inward while
lifting up or out.
Jack Storage Cover Tabs
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
4. Release the Velcro straps and pull outward or
up on the jack and tools to remove.
Jack Removal (Third Row Seating Without Air Suspension)
Jack Removal (Third Row Seating With Air Suspension)
5. Jack And Tools Description
Jack And Tools
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, spare tire
locations vary from second and third row seating.
Second Row Seating
For vehicle’s equipped with second row seating,
the spare tire is located in the rear cargo area
under the load floor.
Spare Tire Location (Second Row Seating)
Third Row Seating
For vehicle’s equipped with third row seating, the
spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or
stow the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench
connected to the square socket extension to rotate
the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
a plastic cover at the center-rear of the cargo floor
area, just inside the liftgate opening.
1 — Jack Tool Bag
2 — Lug Nut Wrench
3 — Tow Hook (If Equipped)
4 — Jack Handle Extension (If Equipped)
5 — Fuel Funnel
6 — Scissor Jack
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Spare Tire Location (Third Row Seating)
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, the
procedure for spare tire removal varies for second
and third row seating.
Second Row Seating
1. Lift up on the rear load floor to access the
spare tire. Remove the fastener securing the
spare tire, and remove the spare tire from the
vehicle.
Spare Tire Fastener
2. Remove the spare tire fastener by rotating it
counterclockwise.
Removing The Spare Tire Fastener
3. After removing the fastener, pull the spare tire
up away from the fastener pin and out of the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
Third Row Seating
1. Lift up on the rear load floor to access the
spare tire winch plug. Locate and remove plug
from the storage compartment floor to
expose the winch access hole.
Winch Nut Plug
2. Fit the jack handle extension over the winch
drive nut. Use the lug wrench handle and
extension to completely lower the spare tire.
Keep turning the handle counterclockwise
until the winch stops.
Winch Drive Nut Location
Wrench Rotation
3. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and
rotate it vertically behind the rear fascia/
bumper.
4. Pull the metal retainer toward you to release it.
Spare Tire Retainer
5. Slide the retainer up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the retainer and push
it through the hole in the wheel.
Releasing The Retainer
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Assemble the jack and jacking tools
Ú
page 314.
Jack And Tools Assembled
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts,
using the lug wrench by turning them counter-
clockwise, one turn, while the wheel is still on
the ground.
Loosen Lug Nuts
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
NOTE:
Proper placement for the front and rear jacking
locations is critical. See the following images for
proper jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
NOTE:
The jack must be placed straight on with handle
facing outwards.
Front Jacking Location
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the
rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear
tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point
symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
Rear Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper
engagement location on the inside of the panel.
Damage of the vehicle may occur if the
procedure is not properly followed.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. For correct lug nut torque Ú page 400.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
Tighten Lug Nuts
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
10. Lower the jack to the fully closed position.
11. Return the Jack and tools back into the jack
storage bin. Reinstall the jack storage cover by
firmly pushing down until the two side clips
lock into position.
12. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible and properly
secure the spare tire, jack and tool kit.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more
than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch
cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire
loose.
Second Row Seating
1. Securely store the road wheel in the cargo
area.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Tire Location
2. Turn the fastener clockwise until secured.
Reinstalling Tire Fastener
Third Row Seating
1. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/
bumper facing outward. Push the end of the
winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve
through the back of the road wheel. Making
sure the valve stem is facing the ground when
the wheel is stowed.
Installing Winch
2. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is
directly under the winch and between the rear
fascia/bumper and exhaust system heat
shields. Raise the tire by turning the lug
wrench on the winch extension clockwise until
it clicks/ratchets three times to make sure the
cable is tight.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Winch Wrench Rotation
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
driver's front seat. There are remote terminals
located under the hood to assist in jump starting.
Jump Starting Posts
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
NOTE:
The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the
fender. The positive battery post may be covered
with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which
has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump
starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not
touch each other, or either vehicle, until properly
connected for jump starting.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) located directly in front of
the underhood fuse box.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
necting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post
of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle have the battery and charging system
tested at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,
000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
Ú page 314 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
gas can, please insert the refueling funnel into the
filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
around the perimeter of the fuel door to break the
ice build up. Re-release the fuel door by pushing on
the rear outer edge near the center to unlatch. Do
not pry on the door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
6. Close the fuel door making sure the latch is
engaged by pushing on the rear outer edge
near the center.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
maintain control of the vehicle before activating
the Manual Park Release. If possible, you should
apply the parking brake. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if
it is not secured or properly connected to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
To activate the Manual Park Release, see the
following steps:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is to the lower left of the steering
column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
NOTE:
Insert the flathead screwdriver or similar tool in the
lower notch of the access cover and gently rotate
clockwise to remove.
Manual Park Release Location
4. Unlock the orange lock plug by turning it a
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Locked — Unlocked Position
5. Pull the lock plug out as far as it will go, then
release it. The transmission should now be in
NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be
moved.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
the lock plug and tether will remain outside of the
trim panel and the access cover cannot be rein-
stalled.
6. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the lock plug out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
to its original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully,
then firmly push the orange lock plug back to
the locking position within the housing.
Re-install the access cover. If the access
cover cannot be re-installed, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 252.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting
occurring).
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 196.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle Ú page 326.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions Ú page 196.
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed
(with rear wheels off the ground) under the
following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For
instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 326.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to
tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front
wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing
dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight
position) with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels ON the ground.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a
two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground),
IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
transmission is in PARK Ú page 196.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore
must be towed will all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. If vehicle is equipped with
Quadra-lift air suspension, secure vehicle only
with tire/wheel straps (no suspension compo-
nents or body) to prevent air suspension from
adjusting during towing against securement
straps and causing damage. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe trans-
mission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be two mounted on the front of the vehicle and
one in the rear. The rear tow hook will be located
on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
Rear Tow Hook
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may come equipped with a front tow
eye that can be used to move a disabled vehicle.
When using a the tow eye, follow the precautions
below.
Tow Eye
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
Tow Eye Warning Label
Tow Eye Installation
The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a
door on the passenger’s side of the fascia/
bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver. Thread the tow
eye into the receptacle, making sure it is fully
tightened.
The tow eye must be securely seated to the
attaching bracket through the lower front fascia/
bumper. If the tow eye is not securely seated to the
attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be
moved.
Front Tow Eye Access Door
CAUTION!
The tow eye must only be used for roadside
emergencies. Use with an appropriate device
in accordance with highway code (a rigid bar
or rope) to maneuver the vehicle in prepara-
tion for transport via a tow truck.
The tow eye must not be used to move the
vehicle off the road or where there are obsta-
cles.
Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck hookup
or highway towing.
Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle
Ú page 328.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these
guidelines are not followed Ú page 329.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may
break, causing serious injury or death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
causing serious injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
cause components to break resulting in
serious injury or death.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
Front Tow Eye Installed
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a
door on the driver’s side of the rear fascia/bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver. Thread the tow
eye into the receptacle, making sure it is fully
tightened.
The tow eye must be securely seated to the
attaching bracket through the lower front fascia/
bumper. If the tow eye is not securely seated to the
attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be
moved.
Rear Tow Eye Access Door
Rear Tow Eye Installed
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 288.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 290.
7
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X X
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs — 2.0L.
1
X X
Replace spark plugs — 3.6L & 5.7L.
2
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner
and pulley, replace if necessary.
X
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change transfer case fluid - Normal
Usage.
X
Change transfer case fluid — Severe
Usage (police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.)
X X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could
cause an accident.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Engine Oil Filter Access
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to
minimize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
engine should be removed using compressed air
or an absorbent cloth.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when
the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor
detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light on
the vehicle graphic outline and the “WASHER
FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and
the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment, be
sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only
(not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer
fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it
to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades,
this will help blade performance. To prevent
freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate.
This rating information can be found on most
washer fluid containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to
minimize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
engine should be removed using compressed air
or an absorbent cloth.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. Water will never have to be added, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water. Refer to Jump Starting
Procedure Ú page 323.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 405.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup
and then quiet down after approximately 30
seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
filters should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 335.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
Mopar® filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With a suitable tool, fully loosen fasteners on
the engine air cleaner filter cover.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover at the
outside edge, tipping it while pushing inboard
to detach the cover from the lower shell at the
hinge to access the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing assembly if signif-
icant dirt or debris is present before replacing the
engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
filter assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage to the cover may
result.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 335.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. There is a glove compartment travel stop on
the right side of the glove compartment door,
partially close the glove compartment door
and pull the travel stop toward you to release
the glove compartment travel stop.
Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed
and the blower operating, the blower can
contact hands and may propel dirt and debris
into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Door
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove
compartment door toward the rear of the
vehicle to disengage the glove compartment
door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose,
remove the glove compartment tension tether
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
face of the glove compartment door and lifting
the clip out of glove compartment door.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
5. Squeeze the retaining tabs together that
secures the cabin air filter cover to the HVAC
housing. Unhinge the filter cover on the right
side to fully remove the cover.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs
fully engage into the HVAC housing.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the
door hinge and reattach the tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove
compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Retaining Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,
frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade
and while holding the wiper arm with one
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade toward the right
side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade
from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab
open and the blade side of the wiper facing up
and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is
flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grab the bottom end of the wiper blade
nearest to wiper arm with your left hand. With
your right hand, hold the wiper arm as you pull
the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past
its stop (far enough to unsnap the wiper blade
pivot from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm).
NOTE:
a. Resistance will be accompanied by an
audible snap.
b. The wiper arm does not stay in the service
up position.
3. Still grabbing the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and away
from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the
bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand,
and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper
arm until it snaps into place.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO Ú page 305.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
CAUTION!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 335.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants
Ú page 405.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition is in the ON position.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to mini-
mize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
engine should be removed using compressed
air or an absorbent cloth.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if
equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested
by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method
for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant should be within the OK range
between the ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the
engine coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant
bottle without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the
coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 335.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid
is abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid Ú page 406. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer's specified
transmission fluid Ú page 406. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 406.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case
assembly should be inspected. If oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the
hole, when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill
plugs is 15 to 25 ft-lb (20 to 34 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 406.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You
could damage them and cause them to leak.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment,
behind the headlamp. This center contains
cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate-
rial. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
water.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an authorized dealer.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Crank Batt
F02 – – Spare
F03 500 Amp Gray – Starter
F04 250 Amp Gray – Alternator
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Aux Battery Input
F07 100 Amp Gray – Rad Fan
F08 80 Amp Gray – Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS) #1
F09 80 Amp Gray – Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS) #2
F10 80 Amp Gray – Feed to IPDC
F11 150 Amp Gray – PCR *
F12 – – Not Populated
F13 40 Amp Green – Starter
F14 – 10 Amp Red GNMM / VPMS*
F15 – 10 Amp Red ECM*
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F17A – 10 Amp Red EPS
F17B – – Not Populated
F18 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer
F19 30 Amp Pink – BSM Valves #2*
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F20 – – Not Populated
F21 – – Not Populated
F22 – – Not Populated
F23A – 10 Amp Red ECM / EPS / PIM / SLM / GPF
F23B – 10 Amp Red AIR SUSPENSION / ELSD RR
F24 – – Not Populated
F25 – – Not Populated
F26 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #2*
F27 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F28 – – Not Populated
F29 – – Not Populated
F30 – – Not Populated
F31 – – Not Populated
F32 – – Not Populated
F33 – – Not Populated
F34 – – Not Populated
F35 – – Not Populated
F36 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #1
F37 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F38 – – Not Populated
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
F39 – – Not Populated
F40 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor #1
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow CADM MAP*
F42 – – Not Populated
F43 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)
F44 – – Not Populated
F45 – 15 Amp Blue Front Axle Disconnect
F46 – – Not Populated
F47 – – Not Populated
F48 – 10 Amp Red CVPAM
F49 – – Not Populated
F50 – – Not Populated
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F52 – – Not Populated
F53 – – Not Populated
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp LT
F55 – 15 Amp Blue BPCM *
F56 – – Not Populated
F57 – – Not Populated
F58 – – Not Populated
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F59 – – Not Populated
F60 – – Not Populated
F61 – – Not Populated
F62 – – Not Populated
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Camera Washer Front
F64 – 15 Amp Blue Smart Bar Control Module (ASBS)
F65 – 15 Amp Blue
ACT Grille Shutter / ACT Rear Axle Coolant Valve / Active Air
Dam
F66 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F67 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / ASBS / Switchable Engine Mount / BSM #2
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp RT
F69 – – Not Populated
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN Coil / IGN Capacitors / Fuel Inj
F71 – – Not Populated
F72 – – Not Populated
F73 – – Not Populated
F74 – – Not Populated
F75 – – Not Populated
F76 – 5 Amp Tan IDCM *
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
F78 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F79 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door / ELCM / Fuel Injectors *
F80 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F81 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed
F82 – – Not Populated
F83 40 Amp Green – LTR Coolant Pump* / Trans Oil Pump *
F84 – – Not Populated
F85 – 10 Amp Red PCR
F86 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed #1 - Valves
F87 – – Not Populated
F88 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed Motor #1
F89 – – Not Populated
F90 – – Not Populated
F91 – – Not Populated
F92 20 Amp Blue – Front De-Icer
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F93 – – Not Populated
F94 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F95 – 10 Amp Red Batt Cool Heater *
F96 – 5 Amp Tan Elect Cool Heater *
F97 – – Not Populated
F98 – – Not Populated
F99 – – Not Populated
F100A – – Not Populated
F100B – – Not Populated
F101 – – Not Populated
F102 – – Not Populated
F103 30 Amp Pink – Frt Wiper
F104A – 15 Amp Blue PECP Low Temp Passive Pump *
F104B – 15 Amp Blue AHP High Temp Aux Pump *
F105A – 15 Amp Blue BCP Low Temp Active Pump *
F105B – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
Interior Power Distribution Center
The Interior Power Distribution Center is located
underneath the steering column on the driver’s
side of the vehicle. This center contains cartridge
fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
Fuse numbers are labeled next to each fuse cavity,
fuse descriptions correspond with the following
chart.
Interior PDC Location
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
authorized dealer.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 25 Amp Clear – MTR Sunshade Sunroof Dual Pane / MTR sunroof single Pane
F03 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Seat Heater Frt (Steering Wheel)*
F04 – 10 Amp Red Night Vision Module / Driver Monitoring Camera (DMC)
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – 15 Amp Blue
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Steering Column
Lock
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – – Spare
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Assy Cigar Lighter
F13 – 10 Amp Red
Assy Mirror Inside Rearview / Digital TV (DTV) - China - Japan /
Sunroof Single - Dual Pane / Port UC1 Dual USB RR / Interior
Monitoring Camera
F14 – – Spare
F15A – – Spare
F15B – – Spare
F16 – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 10 Amp Red
Overhead Console Assy (OHC) W/Sunshade / Intrusion
Module / Intrusion Sensor / Siren / Heads Up Display (HUD) /
Digital TV (DTV) China - Japan
F21 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake - After market
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 – 15 Amp Blue
MOD ICS Switch Bank / SW Bank Upper / SW EPB / Aux
Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
Transfer case SW / Humidity Rain Light Sensor (HRLS) /
Suspension SW*
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heater
F36 – – Spare
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – – Spare
F41A – 10 Amp Red MOD Occupant Class / Steering Column Lock
F41B – 10 Amp Red Spare
F42A – 10 Amp Red
Parktronics System MOD (PTS) / MOD Haptic Lane
Feedback / Trailer Tow Module
F42B – 10 Amp Red MOD HVAC Control / Frt ERC Motor Ctrl / RR ERC Motor Ctrl
F43A – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F43B – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Cluster CCN / MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F45 – – Spare
F46 – – Spare
F47A – – Spare
F47B – – Spare
F48A – – Spare
F48B – – Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown MOD RF HUB / Module Ignition (MD KIN)
F50A – 10 Amp Red
Telematics Box Module (TBM) / MOD Front Passenger Display
Module (FPDM) / MOD DCSD*
F50B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics 1 & 2
F51A – – Spare
F51B – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CMCM (Radio)
F54A – – Spare
F54B – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62A – – Spare
F62B – – Spare
F63A – 15 Amp Blue
Media HUB #1 Frt / Port UC1 Dual USB Frt / Wireless
Charging Pad MOD (WCPM) - High/Premium Only
F63B – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F64A – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F64B – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F65 – 5 Amp Tan MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F66 – – Spare
CB1 – – Spare
CB2 – – Spare
CB3 – – Spare
CB4 – – Spare
CB5 – – Spare
CB6 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Power Distribution Center
The Rear Power Distribution Center is located
underneath the passenger seat. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers. The following chart corresponds
to the fuses inside.
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F03 Shunt – Auxiliary Battery Feed *
F05 150 Amp Gray – Underhood PDC Feed *
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 50 Amp Red – Mod BCM Feed #2
F12 – – Spare
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15A – – Spare
F15B – 10 Amp Red
Hands Free Liftgate / Rear Window Switches / MOD HVAC
Cntrl Frt
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
F16 – – Spare
F17 40 Amp Green – Mod BCM Feed #3
F18 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F19A – 10 Amp Red L2+ Driver Alert Lighting Module
F19B – – Spare
F20A – 15 Amp Blue Central ADAS Decision Module (CADM) - LO
F20B – – Spare
F21A – – Spare
F21B – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – 10 Amp Red Media Hub #2 (RR) / #3 (LR)
F24 – – Spare
F25 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F26 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Dump 3rd Row (LT & RT)*
F27 – – Spare
F28 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Passenger Frt)
F29A – 10 Amp Red MOD ICS Switch Bank Rear (Frt Console)
F29B – – Spare
F30 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Driver Frt)
F31 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – MOD Door MUX Driver
F35 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #2
F36A – 10 Amp Red Intelligent Event Base Lighting Module
F36B – 10 Amp Red Port Pwr USB Console (USB CH Only) / Port UCI Dual USB Rear
F37 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #1
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 30 Amp Green Mod Audio Amplifier #1A
F41 – – Spare
F42A – – Spare
F42B – 10 Amp Red
Rear Entertainment Screens 1 (Res1) / (Res2) / Media Hub
#2 RR Wake Up / Media Hub #3 Wake Up / APO Illumination /
2nd - 3rd Row Seat Switches-Illumination
F43 – – Spare
F44A – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Ign)
F44B – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Battery)
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heated Seat RR RT)
F46 30 Amp Pink – WL75 Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #1*
F47 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
F50 – 15 Amp Blue
Seat Massage Driver Mod (SSMD) / Seat Massage Passenger
Mod (SSMP)*
F51 – 30 Amp Green MOD IAir Suspension (Valves)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heat Seat RR LT)*
F53 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Rear #1
F54 – – Spare
F55 30 Amp Pink – MOD Inverter
F56 30 Amp Pink – WL75 Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #2*
F57 – – Spare
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
3rd Row Additional USB charge (Only LT - RT) / Port Pwr USB
Console UBS (CH Only)
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (Driver)*
F63 30 Amp Pink – Assy Trailer Tow Receptacle B+
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Passenger Rear - Smart Motor
F67 – 30 Amp Green MOD Audio Amplifier #1B
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 20 Amp Yellow L2+ Central ADAS Decision Module (CADM) MID*
F70 – 10 Amp Red
Video Routing Module (VRM) / Port Power - USB IP (USB Ch
Only)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – 5 Amp Tan L2+ Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) - 2*
F75 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
F76 – – Spare
F77 – – Spare
F78 50 Amp Red – MOD IAir Suspension
F79 – – Spare
F80 – – Spare
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (PASS)*
F82 – 10 Amp Red SW Seat Heater (RR RT - RR LT)*
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – – Spare
F86 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support Driver - Passenger SW*
F87 – – Spare
F88 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Driver Rear - Smart Motor
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water
to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this
section includes bulb description and replacement
part numbers.
Interior Bulbs
NOTE:
The Interior lights are LED, for replacement of any
LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
NOTE:
The exterior lights are LED, for replacement of any
LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
Ú page 186.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing, refer Ú page 186.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
NOTE:
The recommended pressures may be different for
the front and rear axles.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance.
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire
is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under run
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
for more information Ú page 264.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 328.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
For further information Ú page 388.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed Ú page 387. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for
more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 194.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/
h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to
be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please see the following table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
LAREDO
Rear
P245/70R17
265/60R18
S Class
LIMITED
OVERLAND
265/60R18
265/50R20
SUMMIT
265/50R20
275/45R21XL
20” - S Class
21” - 12mm
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
LAREDO
Rear
P245/70R17
265/60R18
S ClassTRAILHAWK 265/60R18
LIMITED
OVERLAND
265/60R18
265/50R20
SUMMIT
265/50R20
275/45R21XL
20” - S Class
21” - 12mm
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitoring System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed
in the correct vehicle position following a tire
rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or
if the buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
8
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front
corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason the
brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 401
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with an octane number lower than
recommended octane can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emission requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating
of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will
allow these engines to operate to optimal
performance. This increase in performance is most
noticeable in hot weather or other heavier load
conditions, such as while towing.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded regular
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as
it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline
in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
89 octane plus gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
9
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 403
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
9
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 23 Gallons 87 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
2.0L Engine Intercooler 4.4 Quarts 4.2 Liters
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow
Package
10.8 Quarts 10.2 Liters
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow
Package
11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
5.7L Engine 15 Quarts 14.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 405
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-30 API SP
engine oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 344.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause
engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 344.
9
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%
Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 1-Speed or 2-Speed Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) - Without Electronic Limited Slip Differential
(ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant, SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) - With Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant, SAE 75W-85
with friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
407
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA C ANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
10
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 409
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further
information.
For French, refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
10
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
411
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .........................................400
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection .....................348
Active Driving Assist System ..........................155
Active Lane Management
System
........................................ 114 , 118, 173
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ..... 115, 118, 144
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............354
Adding Fuel ....................................................185
Additives, Fuel ...............................................402
Adjust
Down ........................................................... 42
Forward ....................................................... 42
Rearward..................................................... 42
Up................................................................ 42
Air Bag ...........................................................110
Air Bag Operation ......................................280
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 277 , 280
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................285
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 288, 333
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................333
Front Air Bag .............................................280
If Deployment Occurs ................................288
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................285
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............289
Maintenance .............................................289
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 278
Side Air Bags ............................................ 285
Transporting Pets ..................................... 306
Air Bag Light......................................... 277 , 306
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter)
............................. 345
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 345
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 345 , 346
Air Conditioner System ................................. 345
Air Conditioning ................................................68
Max .............................................................67
Rear.............................................................72
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................74 , 345
Air Conditioning System ...................................73
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................74
Air Filter ........................................................ 345
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 385
Alarm
Arm The System
................................... 26 , 27
Disarm The System .....................................26
Rearm The System ......................................27
Security Alarm .......................................... 113
Alarm System
Security Alarm
.............................................26
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .........................................................12
Amazon FireTV .....................................235 , 240
Amazon FireTV Built-in .................................. 235
Ambient Light
Multicolor
.....................................................64
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................. 353 , 404
Disposal .................................................... 355
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..............114 , 249
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 114
Apps .............................................................. 234
Arming System
Security Alarm
.............................................26
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 256
Audio Systems (Radio) .........................106 , 203
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................82
Auto Hold ....................................117 , 118, 128
Automatic Folding Mirrors ................................53
Automatic Headlights .......................................60
Automatic High Beams .....................................59
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............73
Automatic Transmission ....................... 122 , 130
Adding Fluid .............................................. 357
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 357
Fluid Change ............................................. 357
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 357
11
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412
Fluid Type
........................................ 357 , 406
Special Additives .......................................357
Automatic Transmission Limp Home
Mode .............................................................132
AutoPark ........................................................123
Autostick........................................................133
Operation ..................................................133
AUX Cord.......................................................... 77
Auxiliary Driving Systems ...............................257
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 79
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................................... 79
Axle Fluid .......................................................406
B
Battery
................................................. 111 , 343
Charging System Light ...............................111
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 19
Battery Saver Feature ......................................62
Belts, Seat .....................................................306
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................348
Bodywork .......................................................396
B-Pillar Location .............................................382
Brake Assist System ......................................251
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................251
Brake Fluid .......................................... 356 , 406
Brake System ...................................... 356 , 400
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................400
Fluid Check ...............................................356
Master Cylinder .........................................356
Parking ......................................................126
Warning Light ........................................... 110
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................... 130
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 378
Bulbs, Light ................................................... 308
C
Camera, Front
............................................... 178
Camera, Night Vision .................................... 180
Camera, Rear ....................................... 176 , 183
Camera, Rear Washer ................................... 176
Camera, Surround View ................................ 183
Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 404
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 339
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 354
Car Washes................................................... 397
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 308
Care And Maintenance ................................. 396
Cargo Area Cover ......................................92 , 93
Cargo Area Storage ..........................................91
Cargo Compartment ........................................91
Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................91
Cellular Phone .............................................. 248
Chains, Tire ................................................... 393
Charging
Wireless .......................................................81
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 379
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)
......................... 121
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 305
Checks, Safety .............................................. 305
Child Restraint .............................................. 290
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 293
Child Seat Installation ............................... 302
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 300
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 292
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 297
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children
................................................ 294
Older Children And Child Restraints .......... 292
Seating Positions ...................................... 294
Child Safety Locks ............................................31
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 402
Cleaning
Wheels
...................................................... 391
Climate Control ................................................67
Automatic ....................................................67
Rear .............................................................70
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ........ 403
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 125
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 390
Contract, Service ........................................... 408
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 354
Cooling System ............................................. 353
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 354
Coolant Level ............................................ 355
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 404
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 355
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 353
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
413
Inspection
....................................... 353 , 355
Points To Remember .................................355
Pressure Cap .............................................354
Radiator Cap .............................................354
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
........................ 353 , 404, 405
Corrosion Protection ......................................396
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................144
Cruise Light ......................................... 118 , 119
Customer Assistance .....................................407
Customer Programmable Features ................204
Cybersecurity .................................................203
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 59
Defroster, Windshield ....................................306
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 25
De-Icer, Windshield .......................................... 67
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................120
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ................................................342
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................355
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...402
Door Ajar........................................................111
Door Locks ............................................... 27 , 31
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .... 31
Doors ............................................................... 27
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 36
Driving ...........................................................200
Tips........................................................... 200
DrowsyDriverDetection ................................. 250
E
Electric Brake Control System
....................... 251
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 249
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 252 , 257
Electric Parking Brake ................................... 126
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........79
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......... 114, 252
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect .................... 136
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 111
Emergency
Engine Overheating .................................. 326
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ............................ 328
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 309
Jump Starting ........................................... 322
Manual Park Release ............................... 326
Refueling .................................................. 325
Tow Hooks ................................................ 331
Towing A Disabled Vehicle ........................ 329
Emergency Braking ....................................... 263
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking
..................................................... 313
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 121
Engine........................................................... 339
Air Cleaner ................................................ 345
Block Heater ............................................. 125
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 125
Checking Oil Level .................................... 342
Compartment .........................339 , 340, 341
Compartment Identification ....339, 340, 341
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 112
Cooling...................................................... 353
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 308
Fails To Start ............................................. 124
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 124
Fuel Requirements ..........................401 , 404
Jump Starting ........................................... 322
Oil .................................................... 344 , 404
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 339
Oil Filter .................................................... 344
Oil Selection............................344 , 404, 405
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 344
Overheating .............................................. 326
Starting ..................................................... 122
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 288 , 333
Ethanol.......................................................... 402
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 308
Exhaust System ...................................308 , 351
Extend, Seats ...................................................43
Exterior Lights ...............................58 , 308, 378
F
FamCam System ........................................... 179
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 345
Air Conditioning ........................ 74 , 345, 346
Engine Oil ................................................. 344
11
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414
Engine Oil Disposal
...................................344
FireTV ............................................................240
Flashers
Turn Signals .................................... 119 , 308
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 60
Flooded Engine Starting ................................124
Fluid Capacities .............................................404
Fluid Leaks ....................................................308
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................356
Engine Oil ..................................................342
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................406
Fog Lights ...............................................62 , 118
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 36
Forward Collision Warning .......... 116, 117, 261
Four Wheel Drive ...............115, 118, 134, 137
Operation ..................................................134
Shifting ......................................................118
System ......................................................134
Four Wheel Drive Operation ...........................134
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................328
Front And Rear ParkSense System ................161
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................358
Front View Camera ........................................178
Fuel ...............................................................401
Additives ...................................................402
Clean Air ....................................................402
Ethanol ......................................................402
Gasoline ....................................................401
Materials Added ........................................402
Methanol .................................................. 402
Octane Rating ........................................... 401
Requirements .................................. 401 , 404
Specifications ........................................... 405
Tank Capacity ........................................... 404
Fuel Saver Technology .................................. 142
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 403
Fueling .......................................................... 185
Fuses ............................................................ 359
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.....................54
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 401
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 402
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 402
Gear Ranges ................................................. 131
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 399
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 188
Gross Combination Weight Rating ................ 188
Gross Trailer Weight ..................................... 188
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 187
GVWR............................................................ 186
H
Hands-Free Liftgate
.........................................90
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 309
Head Restraints ...............................................47
Headlights .......................................................58
Automatic ....................................................60
Cleaning ................................................... 397
Delay ...........................................................61
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........59
Leveling .......................................................62
Lights On Reminder .....................................61
On With Wipers ............................................60
Passing ........................................................60
Switch ..........................................................58
Heads Up Display (HUD) ................................ 107
Heated Mirrors .................................................53
Heated Seats ...................................................46
Heated Steering Wheel ....................................33
Heater, Engine Block ..................................... 125
Hill Descent Control ............................. 119 , 254
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 254
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 256
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 190
Hold ’N Go ..................................................... 128
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................54
Hood
Closing
...................................................... 112
Opening .................................................... 112
Hood Release ...................................................87
HUD............................................................... 107
I
Ignition
.............................................................22
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ......................22
Key Fob Not Detected ..................................22
Keyless Ignition ...........................................22
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
415
Keyless Push Button
................................... 22
Push Button Ignition .................................... 22
Switch ......................................................... 22
Ignition Park Interlock ....................................130
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 21
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................50 , 309
Instrument Cluster ........................................... 98
Descriptions ..............................................119
Display ........................................................ 99
Home ........................................................104
Menu Items ...............................................104
Instrument Cluster Display
Vehicle Info
...............................................105
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................398
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 63
Interior Appearance Care ...............................398
Interior Lights .................................................. 63
Interior Monitoring Camera ...........................179
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................65
Intersection Collision Assist ...........................264
Inverter
Power .......................................................... 81
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 77
J
Jack Location .................................................314
Jack Operation ...............................................318
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions .........313
Jacking Instructions .......................................318
Jump Starting ................................................322
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
..........................................26
Disarm The System .....................................26
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............21
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................19
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................21
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .................................... 122
Passive Entry ...............................................28
Passive Entry Programming .........................28
Keys.................................................................17
Replacement ...............................................21
Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................................21
L
Lane Change Assist
.........................................62
Lane Management System ........................... 173
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 271
Latches ......................................................... 308
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 401
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 308
Life Of Tires ................................................... 388
Liftgate ...................................................88 , 112
Adjustable Height ........................................89
Closing.........................................................88
Hands-Free ..................................................90
Opening .......................................................88
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................66
Light Bulbs .................................................... 308
Lights ............................................................ 308
Air Bag ....................................110 , 277, 306
Ambient .......................................................63
Ambient, Mutlicolor ......................................64
Automatic Headlights ..................................60
Brake Assist Warning ................................ 254
Brake Warning .......................................... 110
Bulb Replacement .................................... 378
Cruise ..............................................118 , 119
Daytime Running .........................................59
Dimmer Switch ............................................63
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................58
Electric Power Steering ............................. 111
Electronic Stability Control ........................ 114
Exterior .............................................. 58 , 308
Fog..................................................... 62 , 118
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 309
Headlights On With Wipers ..........................60
High Beam ................................................ 120
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................59
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..........119, 254
Interior .........................................................63
Lights On Reminder .....................................61
Low Fuel ................................................... 114
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 115
NEUTRAL .................................................. 117
Night Vision.............................112 , 115, 118
Oil Temperature ........................................ 112
Park ................................................... 60 , 118
11
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416
Passing
........................................................60
Reading ....................................................... 63
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................113
Security Alarm ...........................................113
SelecSpeed Control ...................................119
Service ......................................................378
Sport Mode ...............................................119
StopStart ...................................................119
Sway Bar ...................................................117
Sway Bar Fault ..........................................117
Traction Control .........................................254
Transmission Temperature .......................113
Turn Signals ..............................62 , 119, 308
Vanity Mirror ................................................ 51
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................108
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................108
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............108
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............108
Loading Vehicle .............................................186
Tires ..........................................................382
Locks
Child Protection ........................................... 31
Manual ........................................................27
Power Door.................................................. 28
Lubrication, Body ...........................................348
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................400
Luggage Carrier ...............................................94
M
Main Menu ................................................... 104
Maintenance ............................................. 85 , 87
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 343
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 334
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ..................................... 115 , 121
Manual
Service ..................................................... 410
Massage
Seats
...........................................................45
McIntosh ....................................................... 234
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ....................34
Memory Seat ...................................................34
Memory Seats And Radio .................................34
Methanol ...................................................... 402
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline
...................... 403
Mirrors .............................................................50
Automatic Dimming Rearview .....................50
Digital Rearview ...........................................50
Exterior Folding ............................................52
Heated.........................................................53
Outside ........................................................52
Power ..........................................................52
Power Folding ..............................................52
Rearview.............................................50 , 309
Tilt Side Mirrors ...........................................53
Vanity ..........................................................51
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .........................................................12
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 264
Mopar Parts .................................................. 409
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................59
N
Navigation
..................................................... 106
Neutral .......................................................... 117
New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 125
Night Vision Camera ..................................... 180
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................... 269
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...................... 401
Off Road Pages ............................................. 245
Accessory Gauges ..................................... 246
Pitch And Roll ........................................... 246
Selec Terrain............................................. 247
Status Bar................................................. 245
Suspension ............................................... 247
Vehicle Dynamics ..................................... 246
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ................... 106
Oil Change Indicator ...................................... 101
Reset ........................................................ 101
Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 344
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 344
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 112
Oil, Engine ..................................................... 344
Capacity .................................................... 404
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
417
Checking
...................................................342
Dipstick .....................................................342
Disposal ....................................................344
Filter ..........................................................344
Filter Disposal ...........................................344
Identification Logo .....................................344
Materials Added To ...................................344
Pressure Warning Light .............................112
Recommendation ............................ 344 , 404
Synthetic ...................................................344
Viscosity ....................................................404
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................120
Operating Precautions ...................................120
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................410
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 52
P
Paint Care ......................................................396
Parking Brake ................................................126
ParkSense
Front And Rear
..........................................161
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................169
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................161
Passenger Screen .........................................229
Passive Entry ................................................... 28
Pedestrian Warning System ..........................263
Permissions ...................................................229
Pets ...............................................................306
Pinch Protection ....................................... 85 , 87
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 382
Power
Brakes
...................................................... 400
Distribution Center (Fuses) .....359, 367, 372
Door Locks ..................................................28
Inverter ........................................................81
Mirrors .........................................................52
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................79
Seats ...........................................................42
Steering .................................................... 142
Sunroof.................................................84 , 85
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ................32
Windows ......................................................82
Power Seats
Down
...........................................................42
Forward .......................................................42
Rearward .....................................................42
Up................................................................42
Power Seats, Third Row ...................................44
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 275
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 313
Pressure Washing ......................................... 343
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 275
Profile ........................................................... 207
Programmable Features ............................... 204
Q
Quadra-Lift
........................................... 117 , 138
Quadra-Trac .................................................. 134
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................. 386
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 354
Radio
Off Road Pages
......................................... 245
Settings .................................................... 204
Sound Setting ........................................... 224
Radio Operation ............................................ 248
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 229
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................66
Rear Air Conditioning .......................................72
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 358
Rear Camera ........................................176 , 183
Rear Camera, Washer ................................... 176
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 260
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 161
Rear Seat Entertainment .............................. 235
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................66
RearSeatReminderAlert ................................ 251
Reclining Front Seats .......................................37
Recreational Towing ...................................... 196
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 402
Refrigerant .................................................... 346
Release, Hood ..................................................87
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 270
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................................23
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................17
Arm The Alarm .............................................26
Disarm The Alarm ........................................26
11
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418
Programming Additional Key Fobs
.............. 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........229
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 24
Remote Starting System .................................. 23
Replacement Bulbs .......................................378
Replacement Keys ........................................... 21
Replacement Tires .........................................388
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................409
Restraints, Child ............................................290
Restraints, Head .............................................. 47
Roll Over Warning ............................................ 11
Roof Luggage Rack .......................................... 94
Rotation, Tires ...............................................395
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
.........................306
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................307
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................409
Safety Information, Tire .................................378
Safety Tips .....................................................305
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................308
Schedule, Maintenance .................................334
Screen, Passenger .........................................229
Seat Belts ............................................ 270 , 306
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................274
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......274
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
.............................................274
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............275
Child Restraints ........................................ 290
Energy Management Feature ................... 275
Extender ................................................... 274
Front Seat............................... 270 , 271, 273
Inspection................................................. 306
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 273
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 273
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 271
Operating Instructions .............................. 273
Pregnant Women ...................................... 275
Pretensioners ........................................... 275
Rear Seat ................................................. 271
Reminder.......................113 , 118, 119, 270
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 274
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 275
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 119
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 273
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 398
Seats ................................................. 36 , 42, 46
Adjustment ...........................................36 , 42
Bolster Adjustment ......................................43
Easy Entry ....................................................43
Extend .........................................................43
Heated.........................................................46
Massage ......................................................45
Memory .......................................................34
Rear Folding ................................................36
Reclining......................................................37
Seatback Release .......................................36
Tilting...........................................................36
Vented .........................................................46
Ventilated ....................................................46
Second Row USB .............................................79
Security Alarm ........................................ 26 , 113
Arm The System ...........................................26
Disarm The System ......................................26
Selec-Terrain ................................................. 137
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................21
Sentry Key Replacement ..................................21
Service Assistance ........................................ 407
Service Contract ............................................ 408
Service Manuals ........................................... 410
Settings ................................................ 106 , 204
Shift Paddles ................................................. 133
Shifting.......................................................... 129
Automatic Transmission .................. 129 , 130
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) ............................. 198
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) ......................... 199
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 271
Side Distance Warning .................................. 167
Signals, Turn ........................................ 119 , 308
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 393
Snow Tires .................................................... 389
Spare Tires ..................................315 , 390, 391
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)
............................. 148
Sport Mode ................................................... 134
Starting .................................................. 23 , 122
Button..........................................................22
Cold Weather ............................................ 125
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
419
Engine Block Heater
..................................125
Engine Fails To Start .................................124
Remote ....................................................... 23
Starting And Operating ..................................122
Starting Procedures .......................................122
Steering ........................................................... 32
Power ........................................................142
Tilt Column .................................................. 32
Wheel, Heated ............................................. 33
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 32
Wheel, Voice Recognition ............................ 33
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................229
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls .........................................................229
Stop/Start................................... 116 , 119, 143
Storage ............................................................ 75
Cargo Area .................................................. 91
Storage, Vehicle .............................................396
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................396
Streaming ......................................................235
Sun Roof ............................................ 84 , 85, 87
Opening ....................................................... 84
Sun Visor ......................................................... 51
Sunglasses Storage .........................................76
Sunshade Operation .......................... 77 , 85, 86
Surround View Camera ..................................183
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic
..................................................136
Sway Control, Trailer ......................................257
Symbol Glossary .............................................. 12
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 344
System, Remote Starting .................................23
T
Telescoping Steering Column
..........................32
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............73
Third Party Apps ............................................ 234
Third Row USB .................................................79
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................91
Tilt Steering Column ........................................32
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 382
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .................... 380
Tire Markings ................................................ 378
Tire Safety Information ................................. 378
Tire Terminology And Definitions .................. 381
Tires...................................307 , 385, 390, 395
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 388
Air Pressure .............................................. 385
Chains ...................................................... 393
Changing .................................................. 313
Compact Spare ......................................... 390
General Information ........................ 385 , 390
High Speed ............................................... 386
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 385
Life Of Tires .............................................. 388
Load Capacity ........................................... 382
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................ 116 , 264
Quality Grading ......................................... 395
Radial ....................................................... 386
Replacement ............................................ 388
Rotation .................................................... 395
Run Flat .................................................... 387
Safety .............................................. 378 , 385
Sizes ......................................................... 379
Snow Tires ................................................ 389
Spare Tires .............................315 , 390, 391
Spinning ................................................... 387
Trailer Towing ........................................... 194
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 387
Types ........................................................ 389
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 400
To Open Hood ..................................................87
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ............. 188 , 192
Towing........................................................... 187
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 329
Guide ........................................................ 190
Recreational ............................................. 196
Weight ...................................................... 190
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 196
Towing Eyes .................................................. 331
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle
.......................................................... 196
Traction Control ............................................ 257
Traffic Sign Assist System ............................. 153
TrailCam System ........................................... 178
Trailer Frontal Area ....................................... 188
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................... 188 , 257
Trailer Towing ................................................ 187
Hitch Cover Removal ................................ 192
11
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420
Hitches
......................................................190
Minimum Requirements ............................193
Tips ...........................................................195
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................192
Weight-Carrying Hitch ................................188
Weight-Distributing Hitch ...........................188
Wiring ........................................................194
Trailer Weight ................................................190
Transfer Case ................................................358
Fluid ..........................................................406
Maintenance .............................................358
Transmission .................................................130
Automatic ........................................ 130 , 357
Fluid ..........................................................406
Maintenance .............................................357
Shifting ......................................................129
Transporting Pets ..........................................306
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................387
Trip Computer ................................................105
Turn Signals ...................................................119
U
Uconnect (Radio) .......................................... 203
Uconnect 5/5 NAV ........................................ 203
Uconnect Settings ......................................... 204
Customer Programmable Features ......28, 31
Passive Entry Programming ..................28, 31
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 395
Universal Garage Door Opener
(Homelink®) — If Equipped
b
.......................54
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 401
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 273
USB
Second Row
................................................79
Third Row ....................................................79
USB Port ..........................................................77
V
Vanity Mirrors
..................................................51
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 400
Vehicle Loading ................................... 186 , 382
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 343
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................12
Vehicle Security Alarm .....................................26
Vehicle Settings ............................................ 204
Vehicle Storage ............................................. 396
Voice Command ...............................................33
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................33
W
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions)
................. 110
Warning Lights And Messages ...................... 110
Warnings, Roll Over ..........................................11
Warranty Information .................................... 409
Washers, Windshield .................... 64, 115, 342
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 397
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 391
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 391
Wind Buffeting .................................................83
Window Fogging ...............................................74
Window Lockout Switch ...................................83
Windows ..........................................................82
Power...........................................................82
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................83
Windshield Defroster .................................... 306
Windshield DeIcer ............................................67
Windshield Washers .............................. 65 , 342
Fluid.......................................................... 342
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 349
Windshield Wipers ...........................................64
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 349
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................65
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................66
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................81
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
2022 GRAND CHEROKEE/GRAND CHEROKEE L
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
22_WL_OM_EN_USC
2022 GRAND CHEROKEE
GRAND CHEROKEE L
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
